Giao an tong hop

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (3.46 MB, 216 trang )

(1)PHÂN PHỐI CHƯƠNG TRÌNH TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 - NĂM HỌC: 2016-2017 Cả năm: (37 tuần) 105 tiết; Bài (Unit)/số tiết. Unit 1 MY FRIENDS (5 tiết) Unit 2 MAKING. ARRANGEMENTS. (5 tiết) Unit 3 AT HOME (6 tiết). Tiết/ năm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18. Unit 5 STUDY HABITS (5 tiết) Unit 6 THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB (5 tiết). Ä Unit 7 NEIGHBORHOO D (5 tiết) Unit 8 COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE (5 tiết). : 3 tiết x 18 tuần = 54 tiết Học kì II: 3 tiết x 17 tuần = 51 tiết HỌC KÌ 1 Nội dung chi tiết. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28,29 30 31 32 33 34 35. Ôn tập; KT Clượng đầu năm Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write (bỏ bài tập 3) Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen Read Write Language Focus Ôn tập & làm quen với dạng đề KT Revision (U.1-3) Kiểm tra (Test 1) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Chữa bài kiểm tra số 1 Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read (thêm 1 tiết) Write Language Focus (bỏ bài tập 2) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read (Không dạy câu g ) Write. 36. Language Focus. 37. Ôn tập & làm quen với dạng đề KT Revision (U.4-6) Kiểm tra (Test 2) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Chữa bài kiểm tra số 2 Read Write Language Focus(Ex.3,4,5) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write Language Focus. Ä Unit 4 OUR PAST (5 tiết). Học kì I. 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49. ĐDDH Bảng phụ Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ,tranh Bảng phụ Bảng phụ,tranh Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ,tranh Bảng phụ Bảng phụ, tranh Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Tranh, bảng phụ Tranh, bảng phụ bảng phụ. Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Tranh, bảng phụ Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ, handouts Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ, tranh Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ Bảng phụ Bảng phụ.

(2) Ôn tập & Kiểm tra học kì I (5 tiết). 50 ® 54. Bảng phụ, handouts. HỌC KÌ 2 Unit 9 A FIRST-AID COURSE (5 tiết). Unit 10 RECYCLING (5 tiết) Unit 11 TRAVELING AROUND VIETNAM (5 tiết). Ä Unit 12 A VCATION ABROAD (5 tiết). Unit 13 FESTIVALS (5 tiết). Unit 14 WONDERS OF THE WORLD (5 tiết). Ä Unit 15 COMPUTERS (5 tiết). (5 tiết). 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70. Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen Read Write. Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Bảng phụ, Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ, Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ, Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ, Tranh, bảng phụ,. 71 72. Language Focus Ôn tập & làm quen với dạng đề KT Revision (U.9-11) Kiểm tra (Test 3) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen Chữa bài kiểm tra số 3 Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen Read Write Language Focus Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write Language Focus Ôn tập & làm quen với dạng đề KT. Tranh, bảng phụ, Bảng phụ. 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92. Máy cassette, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ, Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ, Bảng phụ Tranh, bảng phụ, Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ, Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ, Tranh, bảng phụ, Tranh, bảng phụ, Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, tranh, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Bảng phụ, Bảng phụ Bảng phụ,. Revision(U.12-14). 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101-. Kiểm tra (Test 4) Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak Listen(dạy listen bài 16) Chữa bài kiểm tra số 4 Read Write Language Focus Ôn tập & Kiểm tra học kì II. Máy cassette, Đĩa CD Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Tranh, bảng phụ Máy cassette, bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Máy cassette , bảng phụ, Đĩa CD Bảng phụ, Tranh, bảng phụ Bảng phụ, Bảng phụ, handouts.

(3) 105 ======. { & { =======. Date of preparation: 12 / 8 / 2012. Period 1. REVISION (English 7). A/ Aims: To review some basic knowledge that students have learnt in Enghish 7, in cluding vocabulary, tenses (the simple present , the simple past and the simple future tense); To help Ss learning English easily. B. Objective : By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to know the method of learning Enghish, remember and use vocabulary, tenses...that they have learnt in Enghish 7. C/ Teaching aids: blackboards, handout. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: @ Warm _up : (chatting) a. Are you happy when you come back to school after long summer holiday ? b. Do you learn English 7 very well ? c. Do you do your exercises of English 7 ? d. Your friend has a new shirt make a compliment. A / New Lesson : I. The method : 1. At school : - Listen to the teacher carefully. - Ask the teacher if you don't know anything. Do actively what the teacher asks ss to do. - Be ready to speak to your partners. - Be helpful to your partners. - Don't make too much noise while you are playing games. - Write the lesson fully. 2. At home: - Learn the lesson combine the books and notebooks. - Learning the vocabulary: Write the vocab until you learn them by heart. - Listen to the stereo and practise speaking correctly. - Apply your knowledge into real situation. - Do more exercises if you can. - Practise translating your lesson into Vietnamese. - Keep writing vocab into your vocab records. - Do homework carefully and fully. - Rewrite what you learned in your notebooks. - Consult many books and other materials. - Organize to learn in groups, pairs or have exchanges with classmates. II. Present simple tense: T helps Ss to review the grammar notes of English 7. to be: am/ is /are ordinary Verbs : (+) V / V ( es /s ) (-) don't / doesn't +V - infinitive ( ?) do / does + S + V - infinitive ? - T asks Ss to give some examples: Lan is a students. I live in Tam Ky. She often gets up at 6 o’clock. - Ss recall the form and the use of the Present simple tense. III. Present progressive tense - Ss recall the form and the use of the Present progressive tense. The form: Be (am / is / are ) + Ving.

(4) The use: - Give some examples: I’m listening to music. We’re waiting for a bus. IV. Simple Future: Will/shall and Near Future: going to - Ss recall the form and the use of Simple Future and the Near Future with “be going to“. The use:  The form: S . F: Will/shall + Bare inf * Near. F: Be (am / is / are) going to + bare inf. - Give some examples: * He will buy a new book. He is going to buy a new book. * They will travel to China. They are going to travel to China. * What will you do tomorrow ? What are you going to do tomorrow? * I will/ shall do my homework. I am going to do my homework. V. Simple Past - Ss recall the form and the use of Simple Past. The use: - The Form: - “to be“ : S + Was / Were + C “Ordinary verb“ : S + V-ed / V2 + O - Give some examples: They (be) tired yesterday. She (do) her homework last night. VI. Modal Verbs: can, must, would, should, ought (to), Have to, need to - Ss recall the form and the use of the Modal Verbs The form: Modal verb + bare inf / ought + to – inf The use of each Modal verbs - Give some examples: + They would like bananas…….. VII. Questions and Questions words: - Ss recall the form and the use of the Questions and Questions words: The form: Questions words + be + S ? Questions words + do / does / did+ S + V-inf ...? Questions words + M.v + S + V-inf .....? Questions words: what, where, when, why, who, which, How, How many, How much ....... - Give some examples: VIII. Adjectives – Comparatives and superlatives Ss recall the form of Comparatives and superlatives of Adjectives. Comparatives: With short Adj: S + V(be) + short Adj + ER + than + O (S2) With long Adj: S + V(be) +MORE + long Adj + than + O Superlatives: With short Adj: S + V(be) + the + short Adj + EST. With long Adj : S + V(be) + the + MOST + long Adj . Give some examples : HCM city/London/Mexico City. *. Consolidation a. Be carefully! The bus ....................... ( come). b. Lan ................... ( not listen ) to music tonight. c. I’m busy now , I ..........(call) her later . d. What ........... you like to watch ? I’d like to watch music program. (would, should, shall, will ) e. She is not a quick runner. She runs ..................................... 2. Homework..

(5) 1. Review all grammar notes and Vocabulary studied of E. 7 2. Do the exercises.. 3. Be ready for Unit 1: Lesson 1: Getting started + listen and read p 10 – 11. ==================================== Date of preparation: 20 / 8 / 2012 U. MY FRIENDS Period 2:. Lesson 1: Getting Started , Listen & Read-P. 10-11 .. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue answer the questions about the dialogue and revise some favorite activities . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to give some information about Nien, Hoa's next-door neighbor in Hue. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Language content : - Vocabulary : words relating to the introducing people - Grammar : + Simple present tense . + structure : (not) be + adjective + enough + to- infinitive . E / Ways of working: Individuals, pairs F/ Procedure I. GETTING STARTED  Ask Ss the questions - What do you often do after school? - Who do you (play badminton) with? - Do you like team games? Why?  Ask Ss to work in pairs looking at 4 pictures (a-d) on page 10 and answer the questions: - What are the boys/girls doing? - What are their favorite activities ? - When do they often play these games?  Give Ss 5 minutes to discuss in pairs Then get feedback from them Suggested answers b) Two boys are playing chess. Their favorite game is chess. They often play chess after school/ in their free time. c) The girls are reading books. They like reading after school/ in their free time. d) The girls are playing volleyball. Their favorite game/sport is volleyball. They often volleyball after school/ in their free time. II . LISTEN & READ (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre -teach vocabulary : -(to) seem [translation] : -(to) look like [ the ditto] -(a) smile [mime] - a photograph [realia] -(a) next-door neighbor [explanation] - enough (adv) [translation] * Checking vocabulary: R . O . R 2. Setting the scene Hoa is talking to Lan - her new friend in Ha Noi about Nien, her next-door neighbor in Hue. 3. Practicing the dialogue :  Let Ss listen to the tape  Ss listen to the tape 4. Grammar point : - T explains some difficult sentences and phrases . - T elicits the sentence from the Ss : "She wasn’t old enough to be in my class". *Form: S + be + (not) + enough + to-infinitive . ( đủ / không đủ …….. để làm một việc gì ) Ex: I am strong enough to move this table..

(6)  Ssand repeat (choral repetition) and practice the dialogue.(open pairs- closed pairs) , T corrects the mistakes of pronunciation . 5. Exercises :  Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions a - d (page 11): Ss answer individually. Then compare with their partners.  T. collects Ss' answers and corrects them if necessary. Answer keys: a) She lives in Hue. c) "She wasn't old enough to be in my class." b) No, she doesn't. d) She is going to visit Hoa at Christmas. @ HOMEWORK:- Learn vocabulary , grammar point . - Be ready for Speak & Listen. - Revise some descriptive adjectives learnt to describe people . ===============================.

(7) Date of preparation: 22 / 8 / 2012. UNI. MY FRIENDS Period 3. Lesson 2. Speak, Listen. -P. 11-13. A/ Aims: To practice describing people's appearance .To listen for specific information. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe someone's appearance using the descriptive adjectives ; listen and fill in the blanks with the correct expressions . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm up (BRAINSTORMING) Ss think of adjectives used to describe body build and hair short fat short brown body build hair. I. Pre- teach vocabulary : - slim (adj) [ picture ] - blond (adj) [ picture ] - curly (adj) [ realia ] ≠ -straight (adj) [ antonym ] - bald (adj) [picture ] fair (adj) [ realia ] - It's pleasure to meet you = It's nice to meet you . II/ SPEAK : 1. PRE- SPEAKING : a. PRESENTATION:. *. Presentation dialogue :  T sets the scene (Dialogue page 11): Hoa describe the girl to LAN and T shows Ss a picture of Mary and asks them to describe her hair and her body build , then models .  Model exchange: Lan: What does Mary look like? Hoa: She is short and thin. She has long blond hair. Ss repeat the dialogue in chorus , in pairs ( some pairs ) Concept checking: Meaning, form, use (to describe someone's appearance), intonation + Describing the body build : This person is + adjective . She / He + Describing the hair : She / He + has + adjective …… + hair . 2/ While - Speaking :  Picture + Word cue drill (5 picture a-e/ page 11, 12). - Make up the same dialogues . - T sticks the pictures on the board and runs through all the people . - T does modeling picture a . Ss repeat in chorus , half ↔ half , T ↔ S1 ; S2 ↔ S3 . - Have the Ss practice in pairs ( open pair , closed pairs ) . - T monitors and calls on some pairs to speak out . a) Van // tall/ thin ; straight/ black.

(8) S1: What does Van look like? b) Mr. Lai // short/ fat ; ball head c) Miss Lien // tall/ slim ; long/ black III/ LISTEN :. ® S2: He is tall and thin. He has straight black hair. d) Ann // short/ slim ; short/ curly/ blond e) Mr. Khoi // tall/ slim ; short/ straight/ black. ( Page 12, 13)  Give Ss 5 minutes to read through 5 expressions and the dialogues (a-d/ p.12, 13) and guess which expression goes with each gap. ( N b : 5 expressions + 6 gaps )  T. collects the Ss 's answers and writes them down on the board  T. plays the tape, Ss listen and check their prediction.. 1 / PRE- LISTENING. 2 / WHILE -LISTENING.  Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers.  T. gets feedback from Ss Answer key: (1) I'd like you to meet (3) I'd like you to meet (5) come and meet (2) Nice to meet you (4) It's a pleasure to meet you (6) How do you do 3 /POST- LISTENING :.  Ask some pairs to play the role of the dialogues then Ss practice the dialogues with their partners. IV / HOMEWORK: - Learn vocabulary . - Describe your father , mother , sister / brother 's appearance ( hair and body ) . - Be ready for (READ/ p.13, 14) New words and expressions: Of all my friends // to spend time doing volunteer work // hard-working // in public // outgoing ( adjective ).. .

(9) Date of preparation: 26 / 8 / 2012. UNI. MY FRIENDS Period 4. Lesson 3. Read - P . 13-14. A/ Aims: Reading for details a text about Ba's friends. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the adjectives when describing people's characters. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups E/ Procedure: I/ PRE-READING.  Check-up : ( Warm up ) Guessing game : - Stick the pictures on the board and describe . - Ss listen and guess who is he / she and say ; if it's right she / he is a winner then goes to the board and describe another picture . 1/ Pre- teach : - a character [ translation ] - reserved ( adj )  outgoing (adj) -sociable (adj) [ the ditto ] - to annoy : to make (you) angry or bored - generous (adj) [ the ditto] - to affect [translation ] - orphanage [ explanation ] - to take up (time) - outgoing = friendly (adj) - (to) tell jokes [ explanation ] 2/ Setting the scene : Do you have any close/best friends? What is his/her name? What does he/ she look like? What does he/ she like? What does he/ she like doing in his her free time? Today you're going to read a text about Ba's friends. Ba describes 3 of his close friends. Do you guess what Ba describes about his friends ?. II/ WHILE-READING :  Ss read the text (P. 13,14). and check their prediction . " About their favorite activities and their characters ."  Multiple choice: Ss read the text again and do Exercise 1-P. 14 (Individuals + pairs work) -T explains the meanings of the phrases: + doesn't affect his school work . / + rather shy / + get tired of … Answer key: a)A b)C c)B d)D Comprehension questions - Run through the questions (a-f) in Exercise 2 P. 14 - Give Ss 10 minutes to read the text again and write the answers to the questions. - Ask Ss to work in pairs and do the exercise 2 - Collect Ss' answers using the Lucky number . Answer key: a) Ba feels lucky having a lot of friends. b) Bao is the most sociable. c) Khai likes reading. d) (A bad things about Ba is that) sometimes his jokes annoy his friends. e) Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local orphanage..

(10) III/ POST-READING :.  Ss work in groups of four and complete the table - Let the Ss read the text describing Ba 's friends to fill in the table . Name Characters Likes doing 1 2 3 - Then have Ss ask and answer about other closed friends . ( if there is enough time ) 1/ What's his / her name ? 2/ What does she / he look like ? 3/ What does she / he like doing ?  T. walks round the classroom monitoring the class, encouraging Ss to talk. IV/ HOMEWORK - Learn vocabulary . Be ready for "Write"(P.15 ) - Make a list of adjectives used to describe people's appearance and characters. .

(11) Date of preparation: 26 / 8 / 2012. UNI. MY FRIENDS Period 5. Lesson 4 A/ Aims: Describing people.. Write -- P .15. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a description of a friend and themselves . ( weaker Ss can answer the questions in textbook using simple sentences . ) C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm up (BRAINSTORMING) Ss think of adjectives used to describe people's appearance and characters. short. outgoing appearance characters.  T. gets feedback and gives Ss some more adjectives if necessary. (humorous, helpful,…) I / PRE-WRITING :. Task 1: Ask Ss to read the information about Tam in the Form and in the Paragraph (WRITE 1) and answer these questions. Ss work in individual then share with a partner . Answer key : 1/ What is his name? ® Le Van Tam. 2/ How old is he? ® He's 14. 3/ What does he look like? ® He is tall and thin and has short black hair. 4/ What is he like? ® He is sociable, humorous and helpful. 5/ Where does he live? ® He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street, Ha Noi. 6/ Who does he live with? ® He lives with his mother, brother, and his elder brother. 7/ Who are his friends? ® His best friends are Ba and Bao. Task 2: Ss make a form like in WRITE 1. Then work in pairs asking and answering the questions about their close friends and take notes (fill in the form) . II/ WHILE-WRITING :.  Ss use the notes to write a paragraph about their partners' friends  T. walks round the classroom monitoring the class, helping Ss to write. Ss work in individual .  Some Ss copy their writing on the board, the whole class give their remarks and correct. III/ POST-WRITING :.  Ss work in group of four, ask and answer about their writings using the questions in the books. HOMEWORK. -Review vocabulary . - Do exercises in workbook . Write a paragraph ( 70-80 words ) about your closed friend . ) -Be ready for Language focus (P.16,17) -(Notes: move/go around: chuyển xung quanh // planet (n): hành tinh // Mars (n): sao hỏa // Mercury (n): sao thủy.. .

(12) Date of preparation: 28 / 8 / 2012. UN. MY FRIENDS Period 6. Lesson 5. Language Focus- P .16 ,17. A/ Aims:. - To speak about people's appearance and what they are wearing. - To review the simple present and the simple past - To practice structure with: "(not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive" B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the structure with: " (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive", use the present simple to talk about general truths C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Blackboard ,extra-board D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I/ REVISION. T checks Ss' writing (the previous lesson). Have 3 Ss copy their writing on the poster at home . The whole class give their comment. T gives marks.  Exercise 1 (p.16): The correct verb form - Ask Ss to work in individual putting the verb in the present simple or past simple then share their answers with their partners . - Get feedback from the whole class Answer key: a) (1) lives (2) sent (3) was (4) is b) (1) are (2) came (3) showed (4) introduced Exercise 2 (p.16) - Tell Ss that the Present simple is also used to talk about general truths . Ex : The sun rises in the East . - Elicit the words from the Ss : - ( to) move , (to) go around , planet (n) , Mars , Mercury (n) . - Ask Ss to work individually then compare their answers with their partners. - Get feedback from the whole class Answer key: (1) sets (2) goes/moves (3) moves/goes (4) is (5) is (6) is - Ask 2 pairs of Ss to read the conversations. Exercise 3 (p.17) - Ask Ss to work in pairs looking at the picture and answering questions a, b and c - Guided questions: * What does the man standing at the bus stop look like? (short and fat). What is she wearing? (blue trousers, a pink shirt and a tie) * What does the man standing near the car look like? (tall and strong = heavy-set).What is he wearing? (a yellow shirt and black trousers) * What does the woman standing near the taxi look like? (thin with short hair). What is she wearing? (green skirt and red blouse) * What does the boy sitting on the ground wearing? (blue shorts and a white shirt) Exercise 4 (p.17) - Give Ss the structure: "Subject + be + (not) + adjective + enough + to-infinitive" - Explain the example and check the meaning, use - Ask Ss to do the exercise in pairs - T. collects their answers and corrects. Answer key: a) not big enough b) not old enough c) strong enough d) good enough II/FURTHER PRACTICE (Speaking and writing) a) I / not tall / play basket ball. ® I am not tall enough to play basket ball. b) He / old / ride a motorbike. ® .................................................................... c) She / not old / drive a car. ® .....................................................................

(13) d) He / strong / carry this bag for you. ® .................................................................... HOMEWORK -Review Unit 1 (vocabulary , grammar...) - Write the sentences above in the notebooks . -Be ready for Unit 2 (Getting Started, Listen & Read)  Date of preparation: 30 / 8 / 2012 UNIT. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Period 7 Lesson 1. Getting Started , Listen & Read- P .18,19. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue on the phone and answer the questions about the dialogue. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will able to know how to make and confirm arrangements on the telephone. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard, extra-board. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I/ GETTING STARTED :.  Ask Ss to work in pairs matching each object with its name..  T. gets feedback from the Ss and helps them to pronounce the words correctly. Answer key: a) an answering machine b) a mobile phone c) a fax machine d)a telephone directory e) a public telephone f) an address book ( make ss interested in the new topic/ theme). II/ LISTEN & READ :. 1. Pre teach : - to make a call = (to) call - to introduce ® to introduce (herself) - to arrange [ example ] - arrangement (n) - is / am / are going to + V-infinitive express an intention in the future . ( T reviews ) -. downstairs (adv). - Hold on. 2. Setting the scene : T. draws 2 girls giving their names: Nga and Hoa. Tell Ss that Nga is phoning Hoa. Ask Ss the questions: "Is Nga phoning to invite Hoa to a party?" "or to see a movie ?" 3. Practicing the dialogue :  T. plays the tape, Ss look at the dialogue and listen. (one time)  Ss listen and repeat (choral repetition) ® open pairs ® closed pairs .  T corrects their pronunciation .  T explains some sentences , phrases which are difficult then runs through the questions . 4 . Exercise :  Give Ss 7 minutes to read the dialogue and answer the questions a - f (page 19) (Ss answer individually. Then compare their answers with their partners')  T. collects Ss' answers and corrects them if necessary. Answer key: a) Nga made the call. b) Nga introduced herself. c) Nga invited Hoa to the movies.. e) Hoa arranged the time.. d) Nga arranged a meeting place.. f) Nga agreed the time.. 5. Role play : Ss make a similar dialogue and practice it with their partners. @ HOMEWORK. - Learn by heart the dialogue..

(14) - Write some sentences about what you are going to do next week / tomorrow / tonight / next Summer holiday . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for "SPEAK and LISTEN " p.20 ,21 .  Date of preparation: 04 / 9 / 2012. U. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Period 8. Lesson 2:. Speak , Listen- P . 20,21. A/ Aims: To practice making and confirming arrangement on the telephone and listening to fill the missing information in a telephone messages. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make arrangements on the phone and fill in the message . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard , extra-board, strips of paper for reordering the conversation . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check- up : Ask 2 Ss to role play the dialogue between Hoa and Nga .  Warm up : Shark attack . ( message) (p.20) 1/ Pre-speaking : Exercise 1 Ordering the sentences in a telephone conversation (p.20)  Ss work individually first, then compare their answers with their partners. - Have Ss order the dialogue on the board . - Correction . Answer key: 1b 2f 3j 4a 5i 6c 7e 8k 9g 10h 11d  Ask Ss to practice the conversation in pairs. Exercise 2 Completing the dialogue.  T sets the scene: Bao is calling Ba to invite him to play chess at the Central Chess Club .  Then run through the dialogue . Have Ss work individually. Then ask them to compare their answers with their partners. Answer key (1) Can/May I speak to Ba, please? This is Bao. (2) I'm fine, thanks. And you? I/ SPEAK. 3) Would you like to / (can you) play chess (with me) tonight? (5) Let's meet / I'll meet you at the Central Chess club.. (4) What/How about tomorrow afternoon? (6) Is 2.00 o'clock OK?. 2/ While- speaking :  Ask Ss to practice the conversation in pairs. T moves around and corrects the pronunciation .  Some pairs play the role of the dialogue in front of the class .  Ask Ss to work in pairs making similar arrangements: (if there is enough time ). ( Ss may do at home ) - to play badminton - Saturday morning (visit grandmother) / Sunday morning / Town's Culture House / 7.00 in the morning. - to go to the movies - tonight (watch a live show on TV) / tomorrow night / the school gate / 7.00 in the evening. II/ LISTEN (p.21) 1. Pre-listening :  Vocabulary : - to leave a message - to make an appointment to see... - available (adj) Setting the scene for the listening: A woman telephoned Kingston Junior High School. She wanted to see the principal but he was out and she made an appointment.  Open prediction : -Ask Ss to work in individual . a) Did the woman leave a message?.

(15) b) Did she want to see the principal in the morning or in the afternoon? c) Did she want to see the principal on Tuesday or Thursday? d) Is the woman's name Daisy or Mary? - T collects Ss' answers . 2. While-listening : -Ss listen again and check their answers-T gets feedback from Ss and gives the correct answers . - T gives instructions for task 2 (Listen and fill in the missing information: page 21). And ask the questions: What's the date today? What time is it now? (Ss fill in the blanks). Then explains to the Ss how to fill in the message (Suppose that you are the secretary of the school and you are writing to the principal.) - T. plays the tape, Ss listen and fill in the blanks (the message and the telephone number) - Ss work in pairs . T collects Ss' answers . - Ss listen again and check their answers . T gets feedback and corrects their answers . Answer key: DATE: (September 6, 2010) TIME: ( 3. 10 pm ) FOR: The Principle MESSAGE: Mrs. Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9.45 on Tuesday morning. TELEPHONE NUMBER: 64 683 720 942 3. Post - listening : - T asks Ss some questions about the dialogue . a/ Who are talking on the phone ? b/ Who did the woman want to see ? - Have Ss practice in pairs . - Get Ss to listen to the dialogue again and fill more information about the dialogue . a/ The Principal 's name ……………………………………………. b/ Woman's address : ………………………………………………. - Get feedback and correct . HOMEWORK. speaking ) .. - Learn vocabulary - Practice speaking with friend about making arrangements ( using the words given in - Do exercises in workbook . . - Be ready for "READ" (Vocabulary + Exercises 1,2 page 21,22) ====================================.

(16) Date of preparation :6 / 9 / 2012. U. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Period 9. Lesson 3. Read- P . 21,22. A/ Aims: Reading for specific information about Alexander Graham Bell. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write the biography of a famous scientist, Alexander Graham Bell. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster paper (T/F statements prediction) D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups. E/ Procedure: Checking up : - Answer the questions : a/ Who are talking on the phone ? b/ Who did the woman want to see ? c/ What's the woman's name ? d/ What time did she meet the Principal ?  Warm-up: Chatting Ask Ss the questions: - Where is Edinburgh? - Where is Boston University? - T shows a picture of the telephone and asks Ss some questions about it : 1/ What's this ? 2/ Do you know who invented the telephone ? 3/ Do you know where he was born ? 4/ Do you know when it was invented ? I/ PRE-READING :.  Pre teach - (to)emigrate [ explanation] - (a)deaf-mute [ example ] -(to)experiment with... [ the ditto] - (to) conduct [ translation ] - (to) come up with  to find. - (a) device [ revision ] -(to)demonstrate [ translation ] - countless (adj) [ antonym] - neither ... nor ... [revision].  Setting the scene: You are going to read a text about Alexander Graham bell, who invented the telephone But before you read , you have to guess if the following statements are true or false . .  T / F statement prediction : a - Ss. f. p.22. work individually and guess then share with their partner . T collects Ss' answers .. II/ WHILE-READING : 1/- Exercise 1: True/False),(6. statements a-f on page 22). Ss read the text (P. 21, 22) and check their guess if the following statements are true (T) or false (F)  T collects Ss' answers Answer key: a)F (in Edinburgh, Scotland) b)F (at Boston University) c)T d)F (1876) e)F (transmitting speech over a long distance) f)T.

(17) 2/ Exercise 2: Putting the events in the correct order (p.22). Give Ss 7 minutes to read the text again and put the events in the correct order .Ss work in pairs .  Give feedback and correct . Answer key: 1d) 2e) 3a) 4g) 5c) 6b) 7f) III/ POST-READING :.  Grids : ( with keys ) - Get Ss to read the text again and fill in the blanks about the biography of Bell . - Ss work in four groups . T monitors and gives the help if necessary then collects Ss' s answers and corrects . ( Ss write on the posters . ) Name : ……….. Alexander Graham Bell…………. Nationality : ………………English ……………. Date of birth : ……………. March 3rd , 1847 ……………. Place of birth : ………………Edinburgh , Scotland ………………. His invention : ……………… telephone …………………………… In 1876 : ………The first telephone message introduced …………………….. In 1877 : ………….The first telephone was in commercial use ………………... @ Homework :. -Learn vocabulary. Read the biography of Bell again. Do exercises in workbook . -Be ready for "WRITE": (Read Exercise 2 first. Then do exercise 1). ====================================.

(18) Date of preparation : 7 / 9 / 2012. UN. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS Period 10. Lesson 4 A/ Aims: Writing a message.. Write -P.23,24. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a message .( weaker Ss can understand the content of the telephone message after T explains using open questions . they can do exercise 2 at home ) C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check- up Some Ss go to the front of the classroom ask and answer about the biography of Alexander G. Bell.  Warm up :. Slap the board. transmit experiment. Emigrate. deaf-mutes Demonstrate. conduct. I/ PRE-WRITING:. 1. Pre-teach Vocabulary : - (a) customer [ explanation] - delivery service (n) [ translation ] - (to) leave a message [ the ditto ] - (to) take a message [ explanation ] - (to) reach = (to) contact [ translation] - order (n) [ the ditto ] 2. Exercise(1) Gap fill - Ask Ss to read the passage then fill in the gaps in the passage (page 23) - Remind the Ss to use the verbs in the past simple - Ss work individually then compare their answers with their partners . - Get feedback and correct . Answer key: 1) telephoned 2) May 12 3) speak 4) took 5) name 6) delivery 7) Mr Ha 8) at II/ WHILE-WRITING :. 1. Exercise (2): - Writing the telephone message - Ask Ss to read the passage on page 23 to get information and write a telephone message . - Ss work individually then compare their answers with their partners . - Before writing , T checks Ss ' understanding by using these questions : a/ What's the date ? b/ What time did the customer phone ? c/ Who took the message ? d/ Who did Mr Nam want to speak to? e/ What did Mr Nam want ? - Get feedback and correct . Correct the Ss 's writing Ask Ss to write the message on the board and elicit the correction from the whole class. Answer key: Date: June 16 Time: After midday For: Mrs. Van.

(19) Message: Mr. Nam called about his stationary order. He wanted you to call him at 8 364 082 Taken by: Mr. Toan III/ POST-WRITING :. - Ss work in group, ask and answer about the message using the questions in exercise 2 ( if there is enough time ) - Correction IV/ Homework : - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for" Language Focus " (on page 25, 26) ====================================. Date of preparation : 8 / 9 / 2012. U. MAKING ARRANGEMENTS.

(20) Period 11. Lesson 5. Language Focus-P. 25,26. A/ Aims: Talking about intentions and activities in future with going to and adverbs of place . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their intentions and activities in future and use adverbs of place . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, extra-board. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up : Check Ss 's homework (writing a message for Nancy). 1. Pre-teach Vocabulary : (a) fishing rod [ picture ] (an) action movie [ translation ] upstairs (adv)  downstairs (adv) 2. Exercise 1:  Ask Ss to answer the question : " What form of the verbs do you use to talk about intention ?  Form :. S + be + going to. + V - infinitive ..  Use : Express an intention and activities in the future .  Ask Ss to read the situations and say what the people are going to do.  Explain the example  Ss work individually then compare their answers with their partners . Some Ss read aloud the answers . The whole class correct . Suggested answers: a) They're going to go fishing. b) She's going to read the new novel. c) She's going to do her homework in Math. d) He's going to watch an action movie on TV tonight. e) She's going to go to her friend's party. OR (She's going to bring something to the party). 3. Exercise 2:  Ask Ss to copy the table (page 25) in their notebook.  Ask them to check column YOU with  or   Ask them to work in pairs asking and answering the questions with: Are you going to see a movie on the weekend? Yes, I am . / No, I am not . and check column YOUR PARTNER with  or   Ask some Ss to report what they are (not) going to do and what their partners are (not) going to do. Example: I'm going to see a movie on the weekend and Dong is, too./but Dong isn't.  T collects their answers and corrects if necessary . 4. Exercise 3: Complete the speech bubbles  Run through all the adverbs .  Set the scene : " BA is playing hide and seek with his cousin , Tuan . Use the adverbs of place to complete the speech bubbles . "  Ask Ss to look at the picture carefully and complete the speech bubbles with the adverbs given in the box .  Let Ss work in pairs then share with another pairs .  Give feedback , ask some Ss to read out the speech bubbles . Answer key: a) ... upstairs b) ... here c) ... downstairs d) ... outside e) ... there.

(21) f) ... inside Homework:. - Write 3 sentences telling your intentions for next Sunday . - Do exercises 5,6,7 in workbook on page . 18,19 . - Be ready for Unit 3(The chores you often do at home),"Getting Started ,Listen & Read". ====================================. Date of preparation: 10 / 9 / 2012. UNI. AT HOME Period 12. Lesson 1. Getting Started , Listen & Read - P.27,28. A/ Aims: To practice asking and telling about one's duty with "have to"..

(22) B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will able to talk about their duties through the chores using model verbs . C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E / Language content : - Vocabulary : Chores . - Structures: " have " talk about the duty and " ought to " use to give an advice . F/ Procedure:  Check-up :Check Ss' s homework (their intentions for next Sunday) 1. Pre teach : -(to) have to [revision] - (a) cupboard [ picture ] -(to) make the bed [ picture ] -(a) steamer [ translation ] -(to) sweep the floor [ the ditto ] -(a) saucepan [ explanation] (to) tidy up [ the ditto ] -(a) stove ® gas/electric/oil stove - (to) wash the dishes = (to) do the washing up. - myself ( reflexive pronoun ) I/ GETTING STARTED :. -. T hangs the pictures on the board and asks ss what the girl in the pictures is doing.. - Ss work in groups of four - Feedback. -T gives some expressions using to describe the pictures. a) ( to) wash the dishes/(to) do the washing up. b) ( to) make the bed. c) (to) sweep the floor. d) (to) cook. e) (to) tidy up. f) (to) feed the chicken. Tgets ss to ask and answer the question:"What do you have to do at home? - Do you have to... ?" -Ss work in pairs : open pair-closed pairs -Feedback. II/ LISTEN & READ :. 1. Setting the scene Nam's mother is going to be home late. She telephones Nam and asks him to do some things. 2. Practicing the dialogue  T. plays the tape, Ss look at the dialogue and listen. (twice)  Ss listen and repeat (choral repetition) ® open pairs ® closed pairs.  T corrects the pronunciation . 3. Grammar point: T elicits the sentences from Ss: “I have to go and visit Grandma after work.” “You ought to go to the market yourself.” * Form: s + have to / ought to + infinitive ? Ex: I have to do my homework  T explains some difficult sentences or phrases . 4. Exercise:  Give Ss 7 minutes to read the dialogue and write down the things Nam has to do . (Ss answer individually. Then compare their answers with their partners')  T. collects Ss' answers and corrects them if necessary. Answer key: - Nam has to cook dinner. - He has to go to the market and buy fish and vegetables..

(23) - ... call her Aunt Chi and ask her to meet his mother at Grandma's house.  T asks some more questions : a/ Who often cooks dinner at home ? b/ But today Who will cook dinner ? Why ? HOMEWORK : - Practice saying about the chores you have to do every day . - Learn new words by heart . - Do exercises in workbook . -Be ready for "SPEAK " .. ====================================. Date of preparation: 13 / 9 / 2012. UN. AT HOME.

(24) Period 13. Lesson 2. SPEAK-P.28,29. A/Aims: Talking about the position of furniture in the kitchen and in the living room. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to describe the position of things in the house using prepositions of place . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Blackboard . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm up (BRAINSTORMING) I/ PRE-SPEAKING. prepositions of position. above. :. Pre teach - a calendar [ realia ] - a rug [ picture ] - a bowl [ the ditto ] - a cushion [ the ditto ] - a counter [ picture ] - a dish rack [ the ditto ] - a lighting fixture [ the ditto ] Kim’s game  T sticks the picture on the board.  Ss look at the picture in 50 seconds.  T hides the picture, Ss write the things in the picture on the board. Ss work in two teams.  Feed back.. II/ WHILE-SPEAKING :.  Exercise 1: Ss work in pairs looking at the picture on page 28 and talking about the position of each item. (T. explains the example.) * If most Ss have difficulty, ask them to answer these questions: - Where's the calendar? - Where's the cupboard?- Where's the bowl of fruit? - Where's the stove? -Where are the knives? (on the wall, under the cupboard) - Where are the flowers? (on the table) * T. gets feedback from the whole class and corrects Ss 's answers.  Exercise 2: Ss work in groups of four discussing which position in the living room they should put the furniture.  T shows the picture and asks : ( - Where is it ? ( It's in the living room) ./ Is it tidy ?(No ,it isn't ) - Ss answer .  T. introduces and explains the require of exercise 2 and gives Ss the structure to use: Suggestions - Let's put the .... on/opposite the... - I think we should put the .... in/on the ....; next to the .... - We should put the ..... between the ..... and the ...... Agreement+ Suggestions - You're right. And let's put the .... next to the ... - OK. And I think we should put ...... - That's fine. And we .... Disagreement+ Suggestions - No. We should put ....... - I don't think so. The ... should be on/above/next to .... the ......  Have Ss work in groups .  Call Ss of each group to practice before the class . Another groups express their agreement or disagreement .  Correction . III/ POST-SPEAKING : ( free practice ) T asks Ss to describe their living room/ kitchen or the things around them ( board, a vase of flowers , books … ) . Ss work in individuals then talk in the class. HOMEWORK -Talk about the position of the items in your kitchen. - Do exercises in workbook ..

(25) -Be ready for "LISTEN".. ====================================. Date of preparation: 17/9/2012. U. AT HOME Period 14. Lesson 3. LISTEN -P.30 ..

(26) A/ Aims:. Listening to a conversation to understand how to make the "Special Chinese Fried Rice".. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson , ss will be able to confirm the correct information using the pictures. given and know how to cook a dish "Special Chinese Fried Rice". C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard , pictures , realia . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure:  Check up: - Describe one of the rooms in your house @ Warm -up : Kim's game : - T uses the picture on page 28 , Ss look at and go to the board , write down the things in the kitchen . Ss work in two groups . I/PRE-LISTENING.  Pre-teach: - a garlic. [ realia ] -. an onion [ the ditto ] green pepper [ realia / picture ] ham [ picture ].  Setting the scene: Lan is going to help her mother to cook dinner. Look at the kitchen equipment (saucepan or pan) and the ingredients (run through the ingredients) on page 30.  Prediction: Ask Ss to guess what items Lan and Mrs Tu use to cook dinner. T collects Ss' answers . II/WHILE-LISTENING.  Ss listen and check their predictions.  T. corrects and gives the right answers: a) fried rice b) pan c) garlic and green peppers d) ham and peas  Ask Ss to listen again and order the recipe for the "Special Chinese Fried Rice" a) Fry the garlic and the green peppers. b) Heat pan and wait until the oil is hot. c) Put the ham and the peas in. d) Put a little oil in the big pan. e) Put the rice and a teaspoon of salt in.  Ask Ss to work in pairs and order . Answer key: 1d 2b 3a 4c 5e III/ POST-LISTENING. Present how to cook the "Special Chinese Fried Rice". Have Ss work in group and retell the way of cooking " special Chinese Fried Rice " start with : First, next, then , after that , finally . - correction . HOMEWORK. - Rewrite the recipe to make the " Special Chinese Fried Rice " using First , then next , after that , finally . - Do exercise 1 in workbook. - Be ready for "READ", learn the new words by heart . ==================================== Date of preparation: 18/9/2012. UNI. AT HOME Period 15. Lesson 4. READ -P-31-32 .. A/ Aims: Reading for details about safety precautions in the home.

(27) B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand about things they must and mustn't do for safety at home in order to protect the children from the dangerous things in home . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Poster, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure:  Warm up (BRAINSTORMING). Danger in the home for children. Fire. (drug, matches, electricity, knives, boiling water, ...) I/ PRE-READING. 1. Pre-teach safe (adj) ® safety (n) to include [ translation ] a precaution [translation ] an object ® household objects dangerous (adj) [ explanation a socket [ realia ] to destroy [translation ] scissors (n) [ the ditto ] to injure [ picture/ explanation] suitable (adj) to cause [translation] Electricity can kill: Điện có thể gây chết người  True/False Prediction (Exercise 1 - page 31) - T. puts the poster on the board, running through the statements. - Ss predict the T/F statements in individual. - T collects Ss' predictions . II/ WHILE-READING.  Ss read the poster (p. 31) and check their predictions individually then share with a partner . T corrects and gives the answers . Answer key: a)F b)T c)F d)F e)T f)T  Correct the false sentences a) to leave ® to keep c) suitable ® dangerous d) cannot ® can Exercise 2: "Why" questions and "Because" answers  Ss work in pairs Answer key: b) Because the kitchen is a dangerous place. c) Because playing with matches can cause/start a fire. d) Because children mustn't put anything into them. Electricity can kill. e) Because dangerous objects can injure or kill children. III/ POST READING :.  Ss work in groups discussing and writing a poster : Safety precautions in the home . Ss use the ideas in the text and their own ones to write the poster in two columns : " must/ mustn't ". - Two groups write the posters using " must " and another " mustn't " HOMEWORK. : - Rewrite the safety precaution in the home in your own words . - Do exercises in workbook .. - Be ready for “ WRITE” ..

(28) Date of preparation: 20/9/2012. U. AT HOME Period 16. Lesson 5. WRITE -P.32-33 .. A/ Aims: Writing a description of a kitchen with the help of words and phrases. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a description of a room in their house using simple sentences and prepositions of position . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , Pictures . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure:  Check - up: Ask three Ss three questions: 1. Why mustn't we let children play in the kitchen? 2. Why must children play with matches? 3. Name at least three dangerous objects in the house:(electrical sockets, knives ,scissors ,matches, beads)  Warm up : Network : I/ PRE-WRITING. THINGS IN THE BEDROOM. 1. Pre-teach: a folder in the corner of ... a wardrobe a towel rack beside (prep)  next to (prep) a jar on the right (side) of ... = To the right of ... a lighting fixture beneath (prep) in the middle of ...  Give Ss 10 minutes to look at the picture of Hoa 's room and the description of it on page 32.  Then ask them to answer orally these five questions: a) What is in the left corner of the room? (There is a desk.) b) What are on the desk? (There are many folders.) c) Where is the bookshelf? (It's on the wall, above the desk.) d) What is beside the window? (There is a wardrobe.) e) Is there a window on the right side of the room? (Yes, there is.). II/ WHILE-WRITING :.  Give Ss 15 minutes to look at the picture and the cues (Write 2 - page 32) to write a description of the kitchen. (Remind Ss to add necessary words; for example: a, the, is, are,...) - Let work in pairs .  T. walks round monitoring the class, giving Ss help, asks Ss to change their writings and check compare then present their descriptions before the class . Suggested answers: This is Hoa's kitchen. There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator (there) is a stove and oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink and next to the sink (there) is a towel rack. The dish rack is on the counter, to/on the right (side) of the window and beneath the shelves. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the middle of the kitchen, there is a table and four chairs. The light fixtures is above the table, and beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers. III/ POST-WRITING.  Comparing and correcting.[ T and whole class correct ] ..

(29)  Ask Ss to talk about the room . ( Look at the picture .p.33 - ask and answer about their position of the objects in the room . )  Have the better Ss write a description of a room in your house . ( they can do it at home ) HOMEWORK: - Write a description of your living-room. - Do exercises in workbook . -Learn the new words by heart . - Be ready for “ LANGUAGE FOCUS” .. ====================================.

(30) Date of preparation: 21/9/2012. UNI. AT HOME Period 17. Lesson 6. LANGUAGE FOCUS - p. 34-37 .. A/ Aims: Practice giving advice with ought to. Practicing using reflexive pronouns and Why-Because Practicing expressing obligations with have to / must. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make and answer Why-questions. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , pictures . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure Exercise 1 (p. 34)  Give Ss an example: I (She) have to (has to) /must sweep the floor every morning.  Ask Ss: When do we use have to or must? ® To express an obligation or a duty.  Ask Ss to look at the pictures, read the open dialogue on page 34 and fill in each gap with have to or must + a verb from the box. (New words: to dust, the fish tank, the garbage)  Ss work individually the compare their answers with their partners.  T. corrects ® Answer keys (1) have to / must tidy (4) have to / must clean (2) have to / must dust (5) have to / must empty (3) have to / must sweep (6) have to / must feed  Ss practice the dialogue in pairs ( open pairs ) . Exercise 2 (P.35) Giving advice with ought to Ask Ss to look at the pictures and the example. Explain that "You are giving advice, using "ought to/ should + infinitive" Elicit the answer from Ss for each picture. ® Ss work individually Correct Ss' s answers. Then ask them to work in pairs. Suggested answers: b) You ought to (get up earlier/ hurry up). c) You ought to (eat more fruit and vegetables// less meat// do more exercise) d) You ought to (go to the dentist's/ see a dentist). Exercise 3 (P. 35,36) Gap fill with reflexive pronouns  Representing the reflexive pronouns given in the box on page 35 (pronouncing, meaning, use and their function in the sentences)  Ss read the dialogues and fill in the gaps with reflexive pronouns (individually)  Ss compare their answers.  T. corrects ® Answer key: b) (1) ourselves c)(2) myself (3) yourself d) (4) himself (5) herself (6) themselves e)7) yourselves  Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. Exercise 4 (P. 36, 37) Making situational questions with Why and answer with Because Ask Ss to look at the pictures and the example. Elicit the questions and answers from Ss for each picture. (Remind Ss to use have to) Ss work in pairs making situational questions with Why and answer with Because Correct Ss' s answers. Then ask them to practice the questions and the answers in pairs. Suggested answers: b) Why does (did) Nam have to cook dinner? - Because his mother will be (was/came) home late. c) Why was Mrs. Vui home late?- Because she had to visit Nam's grandmother after work. d) Why did Ha fail her English exam? - Because she played computer games a lot. She didn't study for her exam. e) Why didn't (couldn't) Nga go to the movies? -Because she had to clean the kitchen and sweep the floor (living room). HOMEWORK: - Practice Exercises again - Review all vocabulary and grammar notes of the three units ( 1,2,3 ) and all skills . - Be ready for “ REVISION FOR UNIT 1,2,3.”.

(31) ==================================== Date of preparation : 22 / 9/2012. Period 18 :. REVISION FOR UNIT 1,2,3.. A/ Aims: To revise some grammar points: - Simple present & Simple past. To practice listening for details (Deliberate mistakes) To ask and answer the questions about Bell's biography To give the exercises in the test and remind all skills .. - Enough/ have to….. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember the vocabulary and grammar points, know how to do the exercises . C/ Teaching aids: Blackboard, textbook D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I/ Language focus : A/ grammar points: 1/ Obligation (present / past ) and talk about intention .  Ask Ss to write 2 sentences about the chores they have to do at home every day. Give Ss an example: At home I have to sweep the floor.  After 3 minutes ask 3 Ss to go to the board to write down their sentences. Ask other Ss to give feedback ® Teacher corrects  Then ask Ss to write 2 sentences about the chores they had to do at home yesterday and things they intend to do in the near future . (Remind Ss to use: had to / be going to do ) Give Ss an example: I had to sweep the floor yesterday.  After 3 minutes ask 3 Ss to go to the board to write down their sentences. Ask other Ss to give feedback ® Teacher corrects 2/ Enough :  Answer the questions, using: S + be + (not) + adjective + enough + to- infinitive 1. Can you ride a motor bike? (No. / not / old)- No. I am not old enough to ride a bike. 2. Can you carry this bag? (Yes. / strong) ....................................................................... Note: enough comes after adjective: tall enough or enough tall? ® tall enough . 3/ Infinitive after modal verbs : Must, have to , ought to/ should . - Get Ss to write structures and remind the uses . - Give some situations and have Ss give the advices . - Have Ss work in pairs, collect and correct . 4/ Reflexive pronouns : - Ask Ss to write all the reflexive pronouns they learnt and remind the uses . 5/ Adverbs of place : here, there, upstairs, downstairs, inside, outside. 6/ Prepositions of place : in , on , under, above , beneath , to the right of , to the left of , next to … 7/ The questions with "Why" and " because " in the answer : - T asks : Why did Nam have to cook dinner ? Ss answer : Because his mother was out . - Have Ss remind of the structure and the use . * Introduce some kinds of exercises they 'll do in the test : + Choose the correct word . + Combine two sentences using " S + be + adj + enough + to-infinitive . + Give the correct form of the word given . + Put the question with Why . B/ Vocabulary : - Have Ss remind of the words they learnt . - T uses the brainstorming , network . + Words describing house, and home : rug, armchair, couch , oven, ……. + Names of the telecommunication devices : fax machine, mobile phone, ……...

(32) + Words describing appearance : thin, tall, short , …… + Words describing characters : generous, reserved , ……… II/ Listening : -Ask Ss to listen to a monologue or a dialogue within 80-100 words for general or specific information . - Have Ss revise the topics they learnt ( Listen in Unit 2-3 .) III/ Reading : - T help Ss read a dialogue or a passage of 110-140 words for general or specific information . they are about the personal information, the biography of a famous science , Alexander Graham Bell . - Give Ss some kinds of exercises they will be able to do in reading skill . + Read and answer the questions . + Read and find True / False sentence.. - Ask SS to read all the texts in the textbook again . IV/ Writing : - Ask Ss to revise section " Write " in textbook . + Rewrite the sentences as directed in brackets . V/ Sample test : ( T gives the handouts and asks the Ss to do at home in groups or in pairs . ) I/ Listening: Listen and answer true (T) or false (F) : 1. A woman wanted to see the principal but he was out. …………… 2. She wanted to leave a message. …………………….. 3. She'd like to make an appointment to see the principal. ………………… 4. She wanted to meet him at 10.30 ………………… II/ Language focus : 1/ Choose the correct word : 1. She's going ( visit / visiting / to visit ) her friends after work . 2. My brother and I can ride to school by ( myself / himself / ourselves ) . 3. The earth ( rises / goes / sets ) around the sun . 4. There is a bookshelf ( on/ in /at ) the left of the room . 5. You must not let children ………… in the kitchen. ( play / played / playing ) 6. The kitchen is a ..... place, isn’t it? ( dangerous / safe / suitable ) 7. Deaf-mutes can ......................................speak nor hear ( both / not only / neither ) 8. You must keep all dangerous objects …………….. children's reach. ( out / out of / out from ) 9. Our parents............................meet us at the airport tonight. ( are / are going to / go to ) 10. They aren't .................. drive the motorbikes . (old enough / old enough to / enough old to ) 11. They ( started / delivered / demonstrated / emigrated ) from Canada to American to find work . 12. She 's wearing a ( red new nice / new nice red / nice red new / nice new red) dress . 2/ Do as directed in the brackets : a. This coat is very warm . She can wear it in the winter .( Kêt hợp câu dùng "enough" ) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. b. Bien Hoa is one of an important ( commerce )……………………………center .( Cho dạng đúng của từ cho trong ngoặc ) c. My sister had to finish the report so she stayed late at the office . ( đặt câu hỏi với" Why" ) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. d.. Nam has to cook dinner because his mother comes back home late ? ( Đặt câu hỏi sử dụng "Why …?) ………………………………………………………………………………………………… e.. The old man isn't strong . He can't walk by himself . ( Kết hợp cặp câu sử dụng " enough " ) …………………………………………………………………………………………………. f.. Wardrobe / beside / window / opposite / desk . ( Viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh sử dụng từ gợi ý ) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. g.The wardrobe is on the right of the bed. (Viết lại câu có nghĩa như câu đã cho , dùng “left” thay cho từ gạch chân )- .........................................................................................................

(33) h.. They intend to invite him for dinner tonight ? ( Viết lại câu bắt đầu với "They are …………. " ) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. IV/ Reading : Read the poster and do the following exercises : SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN THE HOME  You must put all chemicals and drugs in locked cupboard . Children may drink or eat these things because they………….(1) ( same / look like/ look) soft drinks or candy .  You must let children play in the kitchen . The kitchen is a …………..(2) ( boring/dangerous/ beautiful) place.  You have to make sure children do not play with matches . Each year, fire destroys homes and injures children because someone plays with matches . Remember , it only takes one match to …………(3)(cause/ make / do) a fire .  You must cover electrical sockets so that children do not try to put ( something/anything/ thing) into them . Electricity can kill .  You have to keep all dangerous objects out of children 's reach . These include : scissors, knives, and small objects such as beads . 1/ Answer the questions : a. Where must we put all chemicals and drugs ?............................................................................................. b. Why mustn't children play with matches ?……………………………………………………………… -* Read the text about Alexander G. Bell (page 21, 22) and answer the questions: 1. When was Alexander Graham Bell born? (He was born on March 3, 1847) 2. Which countries did he emigrate to? (He emigrated first to Canada and then to the USA.) 3. Who did he work with at Boston University? (He worked with deaf-mutes.) 4 . What did he experiment with?(He experimented with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance.) 5. When did Bell and his assistant first introduce the telephone? (In 1876) 6. When was the first telephone in commercial use? (By 1877) HOMEWORK write the telephone message- Ask and answer the questions with WHY and BECAUSE .Read the poster about Safety Precautions in the home .. - Sentences with ENOUGH/ HAVE TO/ MUST/ OUGHT TO. - Be ready for one period test . ====================================.

(34) ONE PERIOD. PERIO. MA TRẬN ĐỀ KIỂM TRA 1 TIẾT LẦN THỨ 01 MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 Họ và tên người biên soạn :Trần Thị Luynh Đơn vị: Trường THCS Trần Hưng Đạo (Ngày soạn: 20/9 2012 ) Chủ đề kiểm tra I. Kiến thức ngôn ngữ (Language focus + Phonetics). Số câu: 12 Số điểm: 3,0 Tỷ lệ: 30%. Nhận biết TN - Tenses: present and past simple. -Reflexive pronouns - prepositions of place. - be going to -Phonetics : stress, pronounce: sound “ed” 6 1.5 15%. TL. Thông hiểu TN - Vocabulary - Adj + enough+ to-infinitive - why…? , Because - Adverbs of place.. TL. 4 1.0 10%. Read a passage about Friends then anwer true or false. Read a passage about Friends then anwer the questions. Số câu: 6 Số điểm: 3,0 Tỷ lệ: 30%. 3 1.5 15%. 3 1.5 15% - enough + toinfinitive. - Why…? Because. Số câu: 5 Số điểm: 2,5 Tỷ lệ: 25%. 2 1 10%. IV. Nghe (Listening). Fill in the blanks to complete the dialogue. Số câu: 6. 3. Cộng TL. 2 0.5 5%. III. Đọc hiểu (Reading). IV. Viết (Writing). Vận dụng TN -Modal verbs: ought to, should - Let’s …. 12 câu 3,0 điểm; 30%. 6 câu 3,0 điểm; 30% - Be going to - prepositions of place - Describe people 3 1.5 15%. 5 câu 2,5 điểm; 25%. 3câu.

(35) Số điểm: 1,5 Tỷ lệ: 15% Tổng số câu Tổng số điểm Tỷ lệ:. 1.5 15% Số câu: 12 Số điểm: 4.5 Tỷ lệ: 45%. 1,5 điểm; 15% Số câu: 9 Số điểm: 3.5 Tỷ lệ: 35%. Số câu: 5 Số điểm: 2 Tỷ lệ: 20%. 26 câu 10 điểm 100%.

(36) Họ & Tên : .................................... BÀI KIỂM TRA 45 PHÚT Lớp : 8 / .... Môn : Tiếng Anh 8 I. / Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau: (3 ms) 1. Our friends .................. meet us at the airport tonight. ( is going to/ are / are going to/ going to ) 2. My sister and I can ride to school by................. ( herself/myself/themselves/ourselves ) 3. There is a bookshelf .................... the left corner of the room. ( on/ in /at / to ) 4. Last week, she ............................. to the library with her friends.( goes/ go / to go / went) 5. The weather is fine........................ for us to go to the beach. ( very/ too/ enough / so) 6. Can you get me the ................. ? I want to steam these potatoes. ( rice cooker /steamer/ frying pan/ sauce pan ) 7. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với từ còn lại: A. permitted B. intended C. missed D. invented 8. Chọn từ có dấu trọng âm khác với các từ còn lại: A. character B. generous C.volunteer D. sociable 9. Hoa: I failed my English test. Binh: a. It’s important to study English . b. You should study English harder c. You must study English. d. Study English is very interesting. 10. Why don’t we go fishing tomorrow ? a. Will you go fishing tomorrow ? b. Let’s go fishing tomorrow. c. Can you go fishing tomorrow ? d. May I go fishing tomorrow. 11. She often ……………. dresses hershelf. ( makes/ make/ is making / making) 12. Don’t come in. Please wait______ for a few minutes. (inside / outside / above / beneath ) II/ Đọc đoạn văn và làm các bài tập sau : ( 3 đ) Do you have any close friends? I think everybody at least has one close friend in their life. And so do I . I have two close friends, Hanh and Mai. We are in the same class at the primary school, and then secondary school. We are also neighbors so we spend most of our time in learning and playing together. Hanh is a beautiful girl with big black eyes and an oval rosy face. She is an intelligent student who is always at the top of the class. She likes reading, and she often goes to the library whenever she has free time. Mai isn't as beautiful as Hanh, but she has a lovely smile and looks very healthy. Mai is very sporty. She spends most of her free time playing sports. Mai is volleyball star of our school. She is also very sociable and has a good sense of humor. Her jokes always make us laugh. I love both of my friends and I always hope our friendship will never die. 1 ) Trả lời true (T) hoặc false(F) a) The writer has no close friends. …………………………. b) She and her close friends study at the same school. ……………………. c) They spend most of their time in learning and playing together because they are neighbors………. 2) Trả lời câu hỏi sau: a) What does Hanh look like? …………………………………………………………………… b) What is Mai like? ………………………………………………………………………………….. c) When does Hanh often go to the library? ………………………………………………………….. IV. Làm theo yêu cầu trong ngoặc đơn : ( 2.5ms) 1.My sister had to finish the report so she stayed late at the office . ( đặt câu hỏi với" Why" ) ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Mr Robinson isn't rich. He can't buy a house . ( Kết hợp cặp câu sử dụng " enough " ) …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3.There/ desk/four chairs/ left corner / room. ( Viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh sử dụng từ gợi ý ) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4.They intend to invite their friends for dinner tonight ? ( Viết lại câu bắt đầu với "They are …………. " ).

(37) - .......................................................................................................................................... . 5. What is your best friend like ? (Trả lời câu hỏi)……………………………………………………… V .Nghe và điền từ thích hợp vào chổ trông để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau: (1,5đ) Lan: Can I help you cook dinner,Mom? Mrs Tu: Sure. You can cook the “ Special Chinese Fried Rice” for me. Use the (1)………………, please. Lan : Okay. How much oil do I put in? Mrs Tu: Just a little. Wait untill it’s hot and then fry the (2)…………………. and the green peppers. Lan: Do I put the (3)…………………………. and the peas in now? Mrs Tu: Yes. And you can put the rice and a teaspoon of salt in. Lan: Yummy! It smells delicious.. K I. LANGUAGE FOCUS : I. (3ms) 1. are going to ; 2.ourselves ; 3. in ; 4. went ; 5.enough ; 6. steamer 7. C ; 8. C; 9. B ; 10. B ; 11. makes; 12. outside B. READING : 1. ( 1.5m) (1) F ; (2) T ; (3) T 2. (2ms) a.Hanh/she is a beautiful girl with big black eyes and an oval rosy face. b.She is also very sociable and has a good sense of humor/ humorous. c. She often goes to the library whenever she has free time/ in her free time. D. WRITING : (2.5ms) 1. Why did your sister/ She stay late at the office? 2. Mr Robinson/ He isn't rich enough to buy a house . 3. There is a desk on the left (side) of the room. 4.They are going to invite their friends for dinner tonight . 5. Tùy vào HS V. LISTENING : (1.5) ( N ội dung bài nghe trong SGV Unit 3 ) 1. big pan 2. garlic 3. . ham ====================================.

(38) Date of preparation: 01 / 10 /2012. UNI. OUR PAST Period 20. Lesson 1. Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.38-39 .. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue and talking about the life of many years ago, using "used to". B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and distinguish between fact and opinion. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I/ GETTING STARTED :  Ask Ss to work in pairs looking at the picture (p.38) and write the names of the things that do not belong to the past. (Eg: the mobile phone)  T. gets Ss to take turn and write the words on the board. (the color TV, the stereo, the lighting fixture, modern clothing, school uniforms...)  While some Ss are writing the words on the board, others ask and answer the question: Do you have a (stereo) ? ® Yes, I do. // No, I don't.. II/ LISTEN & READ: (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre-teach vocabulary What + be +....like ? (What was life like then?) - Great-grandma (n)[explanation] - equipment (n)[example] lit [mime] - a folktale = a tale [example] - traditional (adj) [ translation ]  Checking vocabulary: R .O .R 2. Setting the scene Introduce the 2 characters in the dialogue. Nga 's grandma is telling her about the past.. - to light -. 3 . Practicing the dialogue  T. plays the tape, Ss look at the dialogue and listen. (one time) 4. Grammar point T elicits the sentence from Ss " I used to look after my younger brother and sister " * Form: S + used to + inf Ex: She used to go to bed early.  Ss listen to the tape and repeat (choral repetition) open pairs ® closed pairs. 5 . Answer the question:  Give Ss 5 minutes to read the dialogue and answer the questions a - e (page 39)  T. collects Ss' answers by getting each pair to ask and answer each question .  T. corrects and writes down the answers on the board. Answer key: a) She used to live on a farm. b) Because she had to stay home and help her mom. c) She used to cook the meals, clean the house and wash the clothes. d) She lit the lamp and he used to tell them stories. e) She asked her to tell her the tale The Lost Shoe. 6. Fact or Opinion  T. explains the difference between FACT and OPINION.  Give Ss 5 minutes to do the task  Get feedback.

(39) Homework  Write 5 sentences telling what you used to do and what you didn't use to do when you were at elementary school or when you were 10 years old . Do the exercises in workbook .  Be ready for SPEAK + LISTEN . ====================================. Date of preparation : 2/10/2012. U. OUR PAST Period 21:. Lesson 2. Speak, Listen -P. 40-41 .. A/ Aims: Talking about the difference between life in the past and that at present, using "used to" and the present simple . - Listening for details and then draw out a moral lesson. B/Objective: By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to use "used to" to talk about the past and understand the story. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, Tape and cassette player. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm up: Play a game "Happy Memories". + What is your childhood memory? + What games did you used to play?+Did you use to cry a lot? A. SPEAKING : I. PRE-SPEAKING:. Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma. Then ask: "Where did Nga 's grandma always live?" ® She always lived on a farm. Ask: "Another the word for always lived? - Answer: "Used to live." Ask Ss to use "used to" to make questions :Where did Nga's grandma use to live?  She used to live on a farm. Meaning: đã thường II. WHILE-SPEAKING: Word cue drill: a. live / Hue/ Ha Noi - Did you use to live in Hue? - No, I used to live in Ha Noi. b. walk to school/ bike c. have/long hair/short haird. study/ evening/ early morning e. get up/late/early. III. POST-SPEAKING:. Compare 2 pictures on page 40, using "used to" to talk about the actions in the past.. Elicit some ideas so that Ss can talk about them. a. Where did they use to live in the past? And now? (in small houses/ big houses, buildings) b. How did they use to travel? (walk/ by car, motorbike) c. What’s about the electricity? (Now there is electricity everywhere) d. What about their life/ work? (hard/ a lot of time for entertainment) e. Did children use to go to school? (Most children used to stay at home/ all go to school).

(40) f. What about their entertainment? (traditional games/ modern games, video games) B. LISTEN I. PRE-LISTENING.  Pre teach - (a) moral lesson - foolish (adj) - (to) lay - laid (eggs) - greedy (adj) - (to)collect - dead (adj) -gold (n)  Setting the scene: Ask Ss to discuss why most farmers raise chickens. (2 minutes) Possible answers: - to get eggs from it. - to get (chicken) meat .- To sell eggs and buy other things Task 1: True/False Statements Prediction: a. The farmer raised chickens and one of his chickens laid many eggs. b. The farmer didn't sell any eggs. c. All his chickens laid gold eggs . d The farmer killed 4 of his chickens to find gold eggs. e. He didn't find any more gold eggs. Ss work in individual . T collects Ss' predictions and write on the board . II. WHILE-LISTENING - T. plays the tape, Ss listen and check their predictions.  Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers.  T. gets feedback from Ss Answer key: a .F b .F c. F d .F e .F Task 2: Listen again and choose the most suitable moral lesson (Answer key: b) III. POST-LISTENING :.  Ss practice retelling the story in groups. Write about the things you used to do last year. - Learn new words by heart . - Do the exercises in workbook . - Be ready for CORRECTION OF TEST 1 .. HOMEWORK:-. ====================================.

(41) Date of preparation : 5 / 10 / 2012. PERIOD 22 :. CORRECTION. A/ Aims: - To help Ss remind of the grammar points relating to the test and correct their mistakes in the test . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to do the test rightly. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure: CORRECTION OF TEST 1: I/ Running through the test :- Deliver the test to Ss. II/ Revising the grammar points and vocab relating to the test :-Telicits the target languages from Ss:  The present simple tense .  Intention : is/ am are going to + V ( bare-infinitive ).  Reflexive pronouns :I-myself , she and I - ourselves , …….  Gerund : enjoy , finish , mind , ……..+ V-ing .  Adj + enough +( for +O ) + to-infinitive .  Modal verbs : should / ought to + V- infinitive in advices .  Why / Because - The words to talk about safety precautions in the home . III/ Correction : - Ask Ss to correct their tests by themselves first .- Have Ss correct the tests (the whole class) . I/ Language focus : Choose the correct word : - Ask some Ss to have the wrong answers to read aloud and the whole class correct . - Get Ss to explain and say why they must choose that word . - Correction . - T gives the answer keys . II/ Reading : - T sticks the poster with the mistake sentences on the board and has the whole class correct . 1) ( 1.5ms) (a) F ; (b) T ; (c) T 2) Answer the questions : (2 ms) a.Hanh/she is a beautiful girl with big black eyes and an oval rosy face. b.She is also very sociable and has a good sense of humor/ humorous. c. She often goes to the library whenever she has free time/ in her free time. III/ Writing : T hangs on the poster on the board . Ss work in groups of five and correct . 1 Why does/ did she stayed late at the office ? Why did she stay late at the office ? 2. Mr Robinson isn't /is rich enough to cann't buy a house . Mr Robinson isn't rich enough to buy a house 3. There is desk next four chairs left corner to room./There are desk the four chairs on the left corner of room There is a desk and fours chairs in the left corner of the room. 4. They going to intend invite their friends for dinner tonight./ They are invite their friends for dinner tonight. They are going to invite their friends for dinner tonight. 5.My best friends is tall and short./ My best friends is Lam Ngoc My best friend is sociable and kind…. IV/ Listening : - T sticks the poster with the wrong sentences on the board and let Ss listen to the tape again and the whole class correct . (1) big pan (2) garlic (3) ham IV/ Talking about the results of the test : - Not many Ss understand , remember the structures , words and do the test correctly . - No one gets good marks [ ten marks ]. - Most of the weak Ss can't rewrite the sentences and even correct the mistakes .- Some Ss can't answer the questions in reading , some Ss can't rewrite the sentences using " enough , be going to , …" in writing . - Some tests have many mistakes about spelling ..

(42) - Many Ss don't do the exercises in listening . Lớp. SL. 81 82 83. 43 44 44. Giỏi (8-10). Khá ( 6.5-7.8). TB (5-6.3). Yếu ( 3.5-4.8). Kém ( 0-3.3). Tb. 7 12 7. 6 16 9. 8 8 20. 17 8 7. 5 6 1. 21 36 36. V/ Homework : - T congratulates the Ss who have the good or excellent tests and flays Ss who get bad marks , then encourages them to study harder . - Ask Ss to correct their tests by themselves again . - Be ready for "Read ". ====================================.

(43) Date of preparation 06/10/2012. UN. OUR PAST Period 23 :. Lesson 3. READ -P.41-42 .. A/ Aims: Reading a folk tale for details. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the story and do all the exercises . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups E/ Procedure:  Check- up Who is faster Ask Ss to give the past simple form of these regular and irregular verbs : to have _had_ to come _____ to change _____ to decide _____ to die _____ to go _____ to run _____ to find _____ to marry _____ to want _____ to drop _____ to fit _____ to make _____ to start _____ to lose _____ to fall _____  Warm up Brainstorming: Name some folktales that you have read . The Folktales . I/ PRE- READING:. The frog Prince. 1/ Pre-teach: - cruel (adj) (translation ) - to appear ( the ditto ) - a fairy ( explanation ) - broken heart ( example ) - prince(n) ( the ditto ) 2/ Pre-questions:. Tấm Cám. Seven - mile shoes. - upset (adj) ( synonym ) - harvest festival ( translation ) - to hold - held - held ( synonym ) - to fall in love with someone ( translation ) - rags(n) ( picture ) - Do you know the story "The Lost Shoe"? - What was the ending of the story? (What happened to the girl name Little. Pea?)  T collects Ss' answers II/ WHILE-READING. Ss read the text(P.41)and find the answer to the pre-question ® T gets feedback from Ss.(The prince fell in love with Little Pea and married her.) 1/ Gap fill (p.41) Give Ss 10 minutes to read the story again and complete the sentences. - Ss work in individual then share with their partners . - T collects SS' answers . Answer key: a) farmer d) marry b) died e) new clothes c) had (used) / again f) lost 2/ Comprehension questions - Run through the questions (a-e) in Exercise 2 P. 41 - Give Ss 8 minutes to read the text again and write the answers to the questions..

(44) - Ss work in pairs . - T collects Ss' answers using lucky numbers . Answer key: a) She was a poor farmer's daughter. b) She made Little Pea do the chores all day. c) Before the festival started, a fairy appeared and magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes. d) ...................................................................................... III/ POST-READING.  Ss work in groups of four reading the story and find information about six characters . 1/Little Pea 2/ Stout Nut 3/ Step mother 4/ A Fairy 5/ Little Pea Mother 6/ Prince .  T. walks round the classroom monitoring the class, encouraging Ss to talk. HOMEWORK :. - Learn new words by heart . - Do exercises in workbook . -. Be ready for WRITE. Notes: burned; escaped; grazed; stripes; wisdom .

(45) Date of preparation 07/10/2012. U. OUR PAST Period 24. Lesson 4. WRITE -P. 42-43 .. A/ Aims: To write a story with the help of words and phrases. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Ask Ss this question: How did the prince marry Little Pea? I/ PRE-WRITING. 1. Pre-teach Vocabulary - to graze (picture ) ( realia ) - to light - lit master (n) ( example ) - to burn - burned ( example ) (antonym ) - to tie somebody /something (to somebody/ something with ...) straw (n) ( realia ) - to escape ( translation ). - stripe (n) -. servant. (n) -. 2. Exercise 1: Gap-fill (p. 42, 43) - Give instructions, ask ss some questions : what is he? Do you know how the tiger got his stripes? How many characters are there in this story? Who are they? - Now you're reading the story and you'll understand . - Give Ss 10 minutes to read and fill in the gaps of the story. - Ss work in individual then share with the partner . - Get feedback from Ss Answer key: 1. appeared 4. left 7. lit 2. was 5. went 8. burned 3. said 6. tied 9. escaped - Have 2 Ss read the story aloud so that the other Ss can follow. II/ WHILE-WRITING. * Exercise 2: Guided sentence building (p. 43) - Give instructions ® an example - Remind Ss of the necessary changes: the farmer ® I; he ® I; his buffalo ® my buffalo... - Organize Ss into groups of 4 so that strong Ss can help the weak ones and give Ss 15 minutes to write. Suggested answers: On day as I was in the field and my buffalo was grazing nearby, a tiger came. It asked why the buffalo was my servant and why I was its master. I told the tiger that I had something called wisdom. The.

(46) tiger wanted to see it, but I told it I left my/the wisdom at home. Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn't want it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw (that I said was my wisdom / saying that it was my wisdom) and burned the tiger. The tiger escaped, but today it still has black stripes from the burns. III/ POST-WRITING. * Correction: Ask Ss to read their sentences one after another. The whole class give feedback and T. corrects. - Have the Ss work in groups of ten , image you are the tiger or the buffalo and retell the story . HOMEWORK:-. Retell the story "How the Tiger got his stripes" - Do exercises 1-4 on page 44, 45 - Be ready for LANGUAGE FOCUS . Date of preparation 8/10/2012. UNI. OUR PAST Period 25 A/ Aims:. Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS -P.44-45 .. - Further practice in the simple past tense, prepositions of time - To practice structure with: used to. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the past simple in questions and answers and talk about the past, using used to and prepositions of time . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Ask some Ss tell the story "How the Tiger got his stripes" Write the past simple form of the verbs (Page 44)  Get 3 Ss to go to the board at a time and write the past simple form of the verbs.  Ask Ss "What is special about the verbs?" ® All the verbs are irregular verbs  Practice pronouncing the past simple form of the verbs (Listen and repeat after the T.). EXERCISE 1:. EXERCISE 2:. Dialogue completion (Page 44)  Ss work in pairs  T. collects Ss' s answers and corrects them.  Ss practice the questions and the answers in pairs.. Answer key: a) Did you eat rice (bread/ a sandwich ...) for breakfast (lunch/ dinner)? b) I rode a bike to school. (I got to school by bike. / I took a bus to school.) c) Where were you yesterday (last Sunday, ...)? d) I had (Math, Physics and Biology). EXERCISE 3:. Prepositions (Page 44)  Ss work individually  T. collects Ss 's answers and corrects them. Answer key: a) on b) in c) between EXERCISE 4:. Used to + verb (Page 45). d) at ... after. e) before.

(47)  T. elicits the photos from Ss:. - Do you remember where Hoa comes from? (Hue) - Where does she live now? (Ha Noi) - Who is in photo (a)? ® Hoa - Where is it? (in Hue) - Who's in photo (b) ® A friend of Hoa. - Where is it? (in Hue) - Where are all the four photos?  Ss work individually. Then compare their answers with their friends'  T. collects Ss 's answers and corrects them. HOMEWORK:. - Write the answers to these questions: a) What did you do yesterday morning?. b) What did you do last. night? - Be ready for Unit 5 (Getting started + Listen and Read) ( revise the subjects at school and the answers for the question :" How often ..." . .

(48) Date of preparation 10/10/2012. UNIT 5. STUDY HABITS Period 26. Lesson 1. Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.46-47 .. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue and talking about the school report. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about Tim's school report. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I .GETTING STARTED. (Brainstorming). Literatures school subjects. Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about their lesson schedule. Use the question with "How often do you have (Math)?" II. LISTEN & READ ( (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre-teach vocabulary - (a) habit [ explanation]. - to give  gave. - a semester [the ditto]. -excellent (adj) [ explanation]. - pronunciation(n) [ translation]. - poor(mark/result) [ example]. -a report card=school report. - to improve. [ translation]. -to be proud (of somebody) [ explanation] 2. Setting the scene Introduce the 2 characters in the dialogue Tim and his mother. Tim's mother is telling him about his school report for this semester.  T. plays the tape, Ss look at the dialogue and listen. (one time) 3. Grammar point T elicits the sentence from Ss " Miss Jackson said you should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation." ; "She asked me to give you this dictionary." *Form: S + said + subject + should + infinitive. *Use: To report advice *Form: S + asked/ told somebody to do something. *Use: To report a command or request..

(49)  Ss listen to the tape and repeat (choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs) 4. Exercises . True/False Give Ss 5 minutes to read the dialogue and (page 46, 47) and do Exercise 2 (True/False)  T. collects Ss' answers and corrects them. Answer key: a) F b) T c) F d) T e) F f) T .Answers the questions  Run through the questions in Exercise 3  Ss write the answers to the questions. - (Ss work individually. Then compare with their partners)  T. collects Ss' answers and corrects them. ( T uses Lucky numbers ) Answer key a) She is Tim's teacher. b) She gave Tim's mother a report card. c) He studied very well (worked very hard) this semester. e)She gave him a dictionary. d) She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation. HOMEWORK:. - Answer the questions 1-5. - Do exercises in workbook . - Learn new words by heart . - Be ready for: Unit 5 (SPEAK + LISTEN) . Date of preparation 12 /10/2012. STUDY HABITS Period 27 A/ Aims:. Lesson 2. Speak ,Listen -P.47-48 .. Talking about the school schedule. Listening for details.. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their study habits and Sarah's studies using the information in her report card after filling in the report card. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard ,Tape and cassette player. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm up (Brainstorming). half an hour (30 minutes). less than an hour how much time? one and a half hours (90 minutes) A. SPEAKING I/ PRE-SPEAKING.  T. elicits the answers to the questions (1-5) on page 48.  Help Ss explain some difficult phrases ( To spend time on … ; help somebody with….)  Give Ss 5 minutes to prepare the answers.  T models: T: When do you do your homework? S: I do my homework after dinner. II/ WHILE-SPEAKING.  Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions. (Ask them to take notes of their friends' answers).  T. walks round listening to the Ss speaking to each other and giving immediate help.  Call a student finished first to go the board and report your friends' anwers using reported speech . Ex: Nam said he did his his homework after dinner. B. LISTENING I/ PRE- LISTENING:. 1. Pre-teach vocabulary - behavior (n) (translation) the ditto ). - comment (n) - co-operation (n).

(50) - participation (n) (explanation ) absent (from) ( situation ) - to attend ® attendance (n)(translation) unsatisfactory (adj)(translation)  Put the poster of Sarah's report card on the board  Explain the grades given by letters (A, B, C, D, F, S, U)  Ask Ss to predict the information to fill in the gaps (2 ® 7). - to miss = to be -. satisfactory. (adj). .  Collect Ss' prediction.. II/ WHILE LISTENING.  Ss listen to the tape (twice or more) and check their answers.  T. gets feedback from Ss Answer key: (1) 87 (2) 5 (3) S (4) C (B). (5) A. (6) A. 7. III/ POST LISTENING.  Use the Sarah's report card talk about her study. (Example: Sarah worked very hard this term and her grades are very good. She missed 5 days of school due to sickness. Her participation and co-operation are satisfactory. Her speaking and .... She needs to improve... )  Or T has Ss work in pairs and answer the questions : 1/ S1: How many days was she absent from class ? or How many days of school did she miss ? S2: She missed five days of school. 2/ Which subject was the report talk about? 3/ How were her participation and cooperation ? 4/ What about reading and speaking? 5/ How about listening comprehension? 6/ What did she need to improve? HOMEWORK:. - Use the information in Speaking lesson write about your friend's study habits. - Be ready for: Unit 5 ( Read ) .

(51) Date of preparation 15/10/2012. UNI. STUDY HABITS Period 28:. Lesson 3. READ ( from Language learner to any time )- P. 49-50.. A/ Aims: Reading for details about how to learn new words. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about different ways of learning new words. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm up: Arrange the letters given into the correct words: AENILREDNU an , ear, lie , read ,………… - Ask Ss to work in two groups( one by one in each group goes to the board and writes) - T introduces two new words : lunar , underline . Then asks " Do you know these words? Are they new words? - Ss anwer: Yes, they are new words. I/ PRE-READING ( T introduces the topic) 1 .Pre-teach vocabulary - mother tongue(example ) -a language learner : ( translation) - to learn (something) by heart (translation) - in order to ... = so as to - to stick (mime).

(52) 2. Instruction: T: "lunar , underline" are new words. What can you do to remember them? - T can elecit from Ss by asking some qs: - Do you learn them by heart? - Do you make up the sentences with them ? - Do you use the dictionary to look up their meanings? - Do you write on the small piece of paper? - Now you are going to read a paragraph and know exactlier. II/WHILE-READING.  Ss read the text (P. 49) and see if they have the same ways of learning new words. Exercise 1 (T/F statements on page 50) a) Language learners learn new words in the same ways. b) All language learners write their meaning of new words in their mother tongue. c) Some learners write examples of words they want to learn. d) They write new words and their uses on the sticker.  T helps Ss to understand the meaning of the statements.  Ss read the text again and do the task. (Individually ® pair-compare)  T. corrects ® Answer key: a) F b) F c) T d) T Exercise 2 (Answer the questions)  Run through the questions (a-c) in Exercise 2 P. 50  Explain some difficult words, phrases and sentences.  Give Ss 10 minutes to read the text again and write the answers to the questions. Ss work in pairs .  T collects Ss' answers using Lucky numbers . Answer key: a) No, they don't. (They learn words in different ways.) b) In order to remember how to use the words. c) In order to remember words better, learners write examples , put the words and their uses on the stickers . III/ POST-SPEAKING :  Make a list of ways of learning new words .  Ss work in groups of eight and write on the posters .  Collect Ss' answers and correct . HOMEWORK:. - Talk about ways of learning new words . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for: Unit 5 - Read (the rest) .

(53) Date of preparation 18/10/2012. UNI. STUDY HABITS Period 29. Lesson 3. READ- ( the rest) P. 49-50.. A/ Aims: Reading for details about how to learn new words. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about different ways of learning new words. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups. E/ Procedure:  Check-up: .. Brainstorming (Ss can talk in Vietnamese the ways they learn new words) Learn the. word by heart copy the word several times ways you learn new words I/ PRE-READING. 1 .Pre-teach vocabulary - to underline(mime) - to revise ® revision (n) ( explanation) - to come across (synonym). - to highlight ( picture/example) - necessary (adj) (translation).

(54) 2. T / F prediction: - T. puts the poster on the board, running through the statements.( T helps Ss to understand the meaning of the statements. ) - Ss predict the T/F statements in individual. - T collects Ss' predictions . a) In order to remember words better, learners write examples , put the words and their uses on the stickers and highlight or underline. b) Every learner tries to learn all new words they come across. c) Many learners only learn new words that are inportant. d) Learners should try different ways of learning words. II/WHILE-READING. Exercise 1 (T/F statements on page 50)  Ss read the text (P. 49) and check their prediction .  Ss read the text again and do the task. (Individually ® pair-compare)  T. corrects ® Answer key: a) T b) F c) T d) T Exercise 2 (Answer the questions)  Run through the questions (d-e-f) in Exercise 2- P. 50  Explain some difficult words, phrases and sentences.  Give Ss 10 minutes to read the text again and write the answers to the questions. Ss work in pairs .  T collects Ss' answers using Lucky numbers . Answer key: d) Because they want to learn important words. e) Revision is necessary in learning words . f) We should try different ways of learning words to find out the best way(s) for ourselves. III/ POST-SPEAKING. Survey.  Ss work in groups of four or five to interview one another and tick the ways they have used to learn new words. Ways of learning words 1. Make a list of words, their meanings and learn them by heart .. Hoa . 2. Write sample sentences with new words. 3. Stick new words somewhere in the house..  . 4. Underline or highlight the words. 5. Read storie in English. 6. Learn words through songs.. Tuan …… .  .

(55) T models first : T: Do you make a list of words, their meanings and learn them by heart ? Hoa: Yes, I do .  Go around and give the help  Have Ss report back . S: Hoa said she learned words by making a list of words, their meanings and learn them by heart ,sticking new words somewhere in the house, and reading storie in English. HOMEWORK:. - Talk about ways of learning new words . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for: Unit 5 ( WRITE): Four parts of a letter . . Date of preparation 20/10/2012. UN. STUDY HABITS Period 30. Lesson 4. WRITE -P.50-51 .. A/ Aims: Writing a letter to a friend giving news about school report and intentions for the next days. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to friend using the words given and the model letter . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Ask Ss to list the ways of learning new words I/ PRE-WRITING. 1. Pre-teach vocabulary - to celebrate. [ revision] - a festival [ translation] - Lunar New year [ example] - the Mid-Autumn festival 2. Exercise 1: Identify the parts and the layout of a letter by doing an Ordering exercise  Ss work in pairs.

(56)  T. gets feedback from Ss ® Correction: B Heading - The writer address, the date).  Ask Ss these questions: letter to?. D Opening - Dear ... , A Body C Closing b) Where does Hoa live? c) Who did she write the. a) Who wrote the letter?. d) What grade did she get for History? e) What did her teacher. ask her to do? f) Why is Hoa going to Hue? II/ WHILE-WRITING.  Exercise 2: Suppose you are Lan and write a letter to a pen pal called Donna in San Francisco. Use the cues given and follow the sample letter in exercise 1 (p. 51)  Give the instructions ® An example (Thank you for your letter. I'm pleased to hear you had a happy Mother's Day.)  Make sure that Hoa 's letter includes: 4 parts (Heading - Opening - Body - Closing)  give Ss 15 minutes to write . Ss work in individual then share with their partner . * Correction: Ask 3 Ss to copy their letters on the board. The whole class give feedback and T. corrects. III/ POST-WRITING. - Have the Ss woks in pairs , ask and answer about their letter using about the questions . - T moves around and give the helps if necessary . HOMEWORK:. - Do exercises 2-4 on page 52-53 Notes: * Commands (Lời mệnh lệnh )/ Requests (Lời yêu cầu/đề nghị): - (Please) open your book. // - Can you (please) open your book. - Please come to my room tomorrow. // - Can you come to my room tomorrow. * Reporting commands and requests: to ask/tell somebody to do something - Be ready for: Unit 5 Language Focus .  Date of preparation 24/10/2012. UNI. STUDY HABITS Period 31. Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS. P.52-53 .. A/ Aims: Further practicing in the use of adverbs of manner. Further practice in reporting commands, requests and advices. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to report some common requests . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Pictures, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure: Exercise 1: Adverbs of manner (Page 52)  Present the adverbs of manner by asking Ss the questions: - How does Quang ride his bike? ® He rides slowly/ fast/ carefully...  Elicit what an adverb of manner is (To answer the question HOW. ® Function and position of an adverb of manner in a sentence.)  Ss fill in the gap by themselves. Then compare with their partners..

(57)  T. collect Ss 's answers and corrects. Answer key: (1) hard (4) softly  Ss practice the dialogues in pairs. (2) fast. (3). badly. Exercise 3: Reporting commands and requests (P. 53)  Presenting new structure (Reporting commands and requests) Setting the scene: Tim's mother Tim's mother went to his school to know about Tim's study. Miss Jackson said to Tim's mother: "Please give Tim this dictionary." (Command) - Tim's mother came home and said to Tim: "Miss Jackson told me to give you this dictionary." Miss Jackson said to Tim's mother: "Can you give Tim this dictionary." (Request) - Tim's mother said to Tim: "Miss Jackson asked me to give you this dictionary." * Concept check : Form: S + asked/ told + O +(not) to infinitive...Use: To report a command or request.  Practice  Ss work in pairs a) Tim: What did Miss Jackson say?. Mom : She told me to wait for her outside her office.  T. asks 3 Ss to write 3 answers on the board and get feedback from other Ss. Exercise 4: Reporting advice (P. 53)  Presenting new structure (Reporting advice) Setting the scene: Tim's mother Tim's mother went to his school to know about Tim's study. Miss Jackson said to her: "Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation." - Tim's mother reported it to Tim: "Miss Jackson you should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation." * Concept check: Form: S1 + said + S2 + should + infinitive.... Use: To report advice  Practice  Ss work in pairs a) Tim : What did Miss Jackson say?. Mom : Miss Jackson you should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation.  T. asks 3 Ss to write 3 answers on the board and get feedback from other Ss. HOMEWORK : - Do the exercises in the text book again and in the workbook . - Learn the structures by heart . - Be ready for: Unit 6 (Getting started + Listen and Read)  Date of preparation 25/10/2012. Period 32. Lesson 1. UNI. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.54-55.. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue and talking about the activities of The Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer And Youth Organization B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more activities of Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer and Youth Organization. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Language content : - Vocabulary : words to talk about Y and Y Activities . - Grammar : Gerunds ( some verbs : like , enjoy , practice , hate ….) F/ Procedure: Brainstorming :  Check the meaning of words and expressions (blind; handicapped; to take part in...) Help the blind people The Y and Y Programs. I .GETTING STARTED.

(58) support cultural activities. II. LISTEN & READ. collect waste paper collect and empty the garbage (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme). 1. Pre teach - to enroll ( translation ) - a form ® an application form ( visual / realia ) - to fill out ( mime ) - to sign ( the ditto ) - a hobby  an interest  Checking vocabulary.: R O R 2.Setting the sceneNga is at the Y & Y office. She is enrolling for the activities for this summer. The secretary wants to know some information about Nga to fill out the form.  Ss listen to the tape and repeat (choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs) 3. Grammar Point: Gerunds ( V-ing ) T elicits the sentence from Ss “ I like drawing and outdoor activities.” * Form: S + like + V-ing.... ( some other verbs : enjoy , like , practice , hate , dislike , …..) Ex: She likes reading books. 4. Exercises : Complete the Nga’ s details :  Give Ss 5 minutes to read the dialogue and complete Nga's details (page 55) . ( individually - pair compare)  T. corrects and writes down the answers on the board.  Ss use the form to make questions about Nga and practice in pairs. 1/ What's her full name ? 2/ Where does she live ?( What's her home address ? ) 3/ What's her date of birth ? ( When was she born ?) 4/ What are her hobbies ? HOMEWORK. - Do exercises in workbook . - Learn the new words by heart . - Practice the dialogue again. - Be ready for (SPEAK + LISTEN)/p.55, 56 . Date of preparation 28/10/2012. UNI. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Period 33:. Lesson 2. Speak, Listen -P. 55-56 .. A/ Aims: Asking for a favor and offering assistance. Listening for details then practicing singing a song . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favor and offer assistance in certain situation. complete the missing words in the song and sing it. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , tape , cassette . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: A. SPEAKING I. PRE-SPEAKING.  T. represents and explains to the Ss two language functions on page 55.( Poster )  T. asks: "How do we ask for a favor?" Ss answer: - Can/Could you do me a favor?.

(59)  T. asks: "How do we respond to a favor?" Ss answer: - Certainly. What can I do for you?/How can I help you? - I'm sorry. I'm really busy.  T. asks: "How do we offer assistance?" Ss answer: - May I help you? / Do you need any help?  T. asks: "How do we respond to offering assistance?" Ss answer: - Yes, please. That's very kind of you. - No, thank you. I'm fine.  T. reads the dialogue a)  Ss listen. The practice the dialogue in pairs. (2,3 pairs)  T. reads the dialogue b)  Ss listen. The practice the dialogue in pairs. (2,3 pairs) II. WHILE-SPEAKING :.  Role play: - Ss work in pairs making the dialogues about the situations given in the box. (T. divides the class into 4 groups and ask each group make a dialogue according to 1 situation) - T. asks some pairs from each group to represent their dialogues. Notes: - to have a broken leg: Bị gãy chân - to have a flat tire: xe xẹp lốp B. LISTENING : I. PRE- LISTENING :.  Pre teach to unite (translation / explanation ) -to hold hands (mime ) to shout out ( example ) -to make a stand Four directions: north, south, east, west - Peace [n] ( antonym )  Open prediction - Ss predict the missing words to fill in the song (13 gaps) . T collects Ss' prediction . II. WHILE- LISTENING :.  Ss listen to the tape (twice or more) and check their predictions.  T. gets feedback from Ss and gives the correct answers Answer key: 7. of. 1. unite 8. world. 2. peace 3. right 9. show 10. place. 4. love 5. north 6. south 11. out 12. stand. 13. world III .POST- LISTENING :.  Ss practice singing the song HOMEWORK - Use the situations given in the boxes (page 56) practice asking for favors and offering assistance. Learn new words by heart . Do exercises in workbook .Be ready for “ READ “ .  Date of preparation 29/10/2012. UNI. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Period 34. Lesson 3. READ- P.57 .. A/ Aims: Reading for details about Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to answer comprehension questions and know something about The Youth Union. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: (Role play)  Give 2 situations in the box on page 56 then ask SS to make dialogues. (2 pairs of Ss) Situation 1: A tourist needs to find a police station / lost passport. Situation 2: A friend needs help fixing her bike / has a flat tire. I. PRE-READING. 1. Pre teach.

(60) - Communist (n)[translation] - federation [the ditto] - principle (n) [translation] - citizenship (n)[translation] - (to) aim [translation] - guideline (n) - personal fitness (n)[ditto] - to establish  to found - a nation = a country(remind) - personality [synonym] 2. Pre- Questions: ( book closed ) a. Do you know what Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union means ? b. Do you know when it was founded ? c. Do you know name some social activities of the Youth Union and its aims? d. Do you know who established the guidelines for the Vietnamese youth? - T asks - Ss' answers . II. WHILE-READING :.  Ss read the text (P. 57) and check their predictions. [ individually and pair -compare ]  T. corrects.  Ss read the text again and do Exercise 1 (P. 57): Fill in the missing ionformation.  T. corrects ® Answer key: a) March 1931 b) December 1976 c) their public awareness (and form their personality) d) the guidelines  T explains some difficult phrases and sentences: soft skill , their public awareness , ……..  Run through the questions (a-f) in Exercise 2 (P. 57). Give SS 8 minutes to read the text and answer them. (Individually work and pair-compare)  T. corrects ® Answer key: a) One can join the Youth Union from 15 to 30 years of age . b) It (the Youth Union ) was founded on March 26, 1931 c) It ( the complete name of the Youth Union) is Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union . d) Yes, we can.(They are helping the Handicapped, cleaning the Environment…. ) e) These activities (They) aim to help the young develop their public awareness and form their personality. f) President Ho Chi Minh established the guildelines for the Vietnamese youth. III. POST-READING :.  Ask Ss to work in groups of eight and complete the table.  Have Ss write on the posters. - Go around and give the help if necessary.  Ask the group finishes first to stick the poster on the board and corrcect.  Name of an orgnization for Vietnamese youth : ……………………………………………………  The aims of the Youth Union: ……………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  Who and What age one can join : ……………………………………………………………………  When it was founded: ……………………………………………………………………………….  Who founded it :…………………………………………………………………………………….  When it is called " Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union ": ………………………………………  Names of some social activities of the youth union:………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  The aims of these activities: ………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. : Be ready for (WRITE)-Learn new words by heart . - Do exercises in workbook. -Write a summary of the youth union. New words: to participate/ to recycle/ to save/ to raise/ to earn (money)/ fund. Use structure with going to tell about your future plan in your letter.. HOMEWORK. -. .

(61) Date of preparation 3/11/2012. UNI. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Period 35. Lesson 4. WRITE -P. 58-59 .. A/ Aims: Writing a letter telling them about a future plan using "be going to ". B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Ask Ss the question: -What are the aims of the youth union?  Warm up : - When was it founded? Revision of the structure :"be going to " . - Ask Ss the use of "be going to " [ to express a future plan ] . - Get Ss to make a sentence :"I'm going to +Verb " . the verbs have to begin with a letter from " A to Z " . I. PRE-WRITING:. 1. Vocabulary:. - to participate (in) = to join [ synonym ] - to recycle [ explanation ] - to register [ example ].

(62) - to save [ the ditto ] - to raise funds [ explanation ] - natural resources [ example ] - sidewalks [ translation ] 2. Exercise 1: (p. 58)  Ss read the notice and answer 2 questions: a) How is the Y & Y planning to help the community? b) How can they help to save natural resources? T. gets feedback from Ss.  Ss read the notice and find the words to fill in the gaps to complete the letter. (pair work)  T. gets feedback from Ss Answer key: (1) community (2) recycling (3) collect (4) send (5) recycling. (6) save. (7) earn 9) planting. (8) participating (10) helping. II. WHILE-WRITING:. 3. Exercise 2: (p. 59)  Ss are helping Hoa to write a letter to her parents telling what she is going to do.  T. gives the instructions. Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt.  Check their understanding by asking some questions : a. Why does Hoa look happy ? b. What is she going to do in the environment month ? c. What are they doing to earn money for their school Y & Y ? Follow the sample letter in exercise 1 (p. 58). Make sure that Hoa's letter includes Hoa's intentions. III. POST-WRITING :. * Correction: Ask 3 Ss to copy their letters on the board. The whole class give feedback and T. corrects. * Chatting : Ss work in groups of five ; ask and answer about their letter . HOMEWORK. :. - Do exercises 1-3 on page 60-62 . Learn the new words by heart . Guidance: Exercise 1: Use the information in the table at the bottom of page 60 to write three questions and 3 answers (a, b, c) for each activity. Exercise 3: (p.62) a) Choose the correct expressions in the box to fill in each gap. b) Gap fill (requests or offers) see page 55 - Be ready for LANGUAGE FOCUS .  Date of preparation 7/11/2012. UN. THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB Period 36. Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS- P 60-62 .. A/ Aims: Practicing talking about future plan using the present simple. Further practice in asking for assistance and offering assistance . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the present simple when talking about future plan. The gerunds , modal verbs , asking for a favor , offering assistance . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups . E/ Procedure: Vocabulary: - the elderly = old people - to gather = to collect - gathering = coming together - to support [ translation ].

(63) Exercise 1: (p. 60) Use the present simple to make questions and answers about future plan.  T. gives the instructions and explains the examples (Activity 1)  Ss work in pairs, using the information in the table at the bottom of page 60 to ask and answer about Y & Y Spring activity program.  T. walks round to monitor the class. Exercise 2: (p. 61)  Ask Ss to copy this table into their notebooks I love. like. don't like. hate. playing soccer performing music gardening watching TV camping playing badminton. love. Lan like don't like.   .  . hate. .  Ask Ss to check the activity with .  Then work in pairs making questions with "Do you love/like...?" to ask their partner and mark the column with .  Ss work in groups of four to tell about their friends. (Example: Lan loves watching TV and camping. She likes performing music and playing badminton. She doesn't like gardening....)  Ask Ss to take notes: Verbs followed by the gerund: love, like, hate, enjoy, practice, suggest, mind, miss, look forward to… + V-ing Exercise 3: (p. 61, 62) a) Ss choose the correct expressions in the box to fill in each gap. ® practice the dialogues in pairs b) Ss use the expressions for asking for assistance offering assistance on page 55 to complete the dialogue  T. walks round to monitor the class. HOMEWORK. : - Do exercises in workbook . Revise the vocabulary reading , writing , and listening in three. unit 4,5,6 . - Review language focus 4 (past simple, prepositions, used to), Language focus 5 (reporting commands and requests), Language focus 6 (asking for assistance and offering assistance, Verbs followed by the gerunds) . - Be ready for One period test 2 .  Date of preparation 10/11/2012. Period 37 + 38 :. REVISION FOR UNITS 4,5,6.. A/ Aims: To revise structures with the past simple, prepositions, used to, verbs + V-ing To revise language functions: asking for assistance and offering assistance, Further practice on reporting commands and requests . - To introduce the exercises in test 2 . - To remind all skills : Listening , reading , writing . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember all vocabulary and grammar points ,and know how to do the exercises in tests 2 . C/ Teaching aids: Blackboard, hand-outs D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:. A/ Language focus : @ . Grammar :.

(64) I/ The simple past : - Have SS remind of the use and the form . - Give Ss some irregular verbs and ask Ss to write in individual then share with a partner . - Correction .  Give Ss the hand-outs and ask them to work in pairs to do the exercises: Exercise: Complete the dialogues:. 0). A: What time did you get up this morning? B: I ___got___ up at 5.45.. 1). A: Did you eat bread for breakfast this morning? B: No, I __________ noodles.. 2). A: Where did Lan go last Sunday? B: She __________ to Mai's birthday's party.. 3). A: Who did she meet at the party? B: She __________ Hoa , and Lan at the party. 4) A: How much time does Tuan spend on history every day? B: He __________ half an hours on Math every day. II/ "USED TO + INFINITIVE":  Positive:. I He They My father This street. used to.  Negative:. I He They My father This street  Interrogative: you he Did they use to her father this street. did not use to (didn't use to). get up late? play marbles? live in the city? smoke a lot? be clean?. get up late. play marbles. live in the city. smoke a lot. be clean. play computer games. work hard. visit their neighbors. walk to work. be dirty. Yes, I did.// No, I didn't. Yes, he did.// No, he didn't. Yes, they did.// No, they didn't. Yes, he did.// No, he didn't. Yes, it did.// No, it didn't.. III/ PREPOSITIONS :(Textbook, page 44) Exercise: Fill in the gaps with ON, IN, AT, BEFORE, AFTER, BETWEEN. 0) We have English lessons ____on___ Monday and Wednesday. 1) I'll phone you _________ Friday afternoon _________ about 4 o'clock. 2) My father usually watches TV __________ dinner. 3) __________ breakfast I usually go to school. 4) His mother was in Ha Noi __________ June 2003. 5) My birthday is __________ March, 28. IV/ Asking for favors and Offering assistance (Textbook, page 55) Exercise: Choose the best word or phrases to complete the sentences. 1) __________ you help me, please? ( May / Let / Can ) 2) What __________ I do for you? ( will / can / may ) 3) Could you __________ me a favor? ( do / make / take ) 4) __________ you need any help? ( Could / Can / Do ) 5) That's very kind __________ you? ( for / of / with ).

(65) V/ Reported speech: Examples:  Mr. Brown said to Mai: "Can you listen to me?" ® Mr. Brown asked Mai to listen to him.  He said to Lan: "Don't look at your book." ® He told Lan not to look at her book. 1. "Tuan, can you open your book?" Mr Baker said. ® Mr Baker asked ............................................................................ 2. Quan's mother said: "Don't go to school late." ® Quan's mother told ........................................................................ 3. He said to them: "Please turn off the lights." ® He .................................................................................................. 4. Hoa said to Bao: "Can you help me with this math problem?" ® Hoa ................................................................................................. 5. Mr Green said to Tan: "You should try your best at school." ® Mr Green ........................................................................................ VI/ Gerunds :- Standing after these verbs : finish , avoid , enjoy , practice , try, like , dislike , deny , …. - Standing after the prepositions: be afraid of , to look forward to , to insist on , be busy with , be surprised at , …… VII/ Adverbs of manner : [note: well, fast, hard , late , early ,straight , long ,….] . @ . Vocabulary: - words to talk about school life : care , take part in , perform , … - words to talk about study habits : examination, revise, ……. - words to talk about future plans : play soccer , go camping , ……. B/ Listening :- Ask Ss to listen to monologue or a dialogue within 80-100 words for general or specific information . - Have Ss revise the topics they learnt [ Education : school life , and study habits . ] C/ Reading : - Help Ss read a dialogue or a passage of 100-140 words for general or specific information . They are about education : school life and study habits . - Give some kinds of exercises they will be able to do in reading skills . Read and answer the questions . - Read and answer true / false sentences . - Ask Ss to read all the texts in the text book again . D/ Writing :- Write an informal letter to a friend about your study using word cues . Ss use the SURVEY Ss have conducted in exercise 2 on page 61 text book to write about themselves and one friends. (Example: I like watching TV; Lan loves watching TV.) E / Sample test: - Have Ss do at home. I/LISTENING : (1.5 ms ) Listen and fill in the blanks : His wife …………(1) to him and they both looked at……………(2) in amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to ……………..(3)all the chickens and find more…………….(4) . Unfortunately, he couldn't find any gold eggs. When he………….(5) all, the …………….(6) were dead. II/ READING : (2.5 ms ). How Nam has improved his English " ... In the first year of lower secondary school , I had some difficulties in learning English . My pronunciation of English words was really bad and my English grammar was worse . I did not know how to improve them . One afternoon after the lesson , my teacher of English told me to wait for her outside the classroom . She took me to the school library and showed me cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase . She also told me how to use an English - English dictionary to improve my English grammar . " Now I think you know what you should do ." said she . I made much progress and only one year later , I won the first prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students in my hometown ." 1/ Answer the questions : ( 2 ms ) a/ What difficulties did Nam have in learning English in the first year ? ............................................................................................................................................................................. . b/ What did she tell him to improve his English grammar ? ......................................................................................................................................................................... . c/ What did he win one year later ? ...........................................................................................................................................................................

(66) 2/ Put true (T) or false (F) : (1 m ) a/ In the first year ,there were some difficulties when he learned English. ………………. b/ After that , Nam and his teacher went to the public library . ………………… c/ The teacher showed him cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in the glass bookshelf . …………………. III/ LANGUAGE FOCUS (3 ms) A/ Choose the correct word : 1/ Chọn từ có phần in đậm phát âm khác với các từ khác : a. highlight b. underline c. exciting d. scissors 2/ ( Let me help you./ I need a favor/ Could you do me a favor? ) - Yes. That's very kind of you . 3/ The students are playing very ( happy/ happily/ happiest) in the school yard. 4/ My father used to ( taking / to take / take) us to the zoo when he was alive. 5/ The children are interested in ( listen / to listen / listening ) to traditional stories . 6/ Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth union was founded in ( March 1931/ 1930 / March 26 1931 ) . 7/ Can you fill ( at/ in / on ) this form for me ? 8/Do you know to ( pronounce / pronunciation / pronounces ) that word ? 9/ Their mother asked them not ( not to make / to not make / to make ) so much noise 10/ He does morning exercises ( so as / in order to / order to ) improve his health. 11/ Tim should practice ( to speak / speaking / speak ) aloud passage in German. 12/ The policeman said: " ( Don't touch / Not to touch/ Not touch ) anything in the room. " IV/ WRITING : (2.5 ms ) Rewrite the following sentences as directed : 1/ " You should do all your exercises before going to bed, Hoa. " her mother said . ( use reported speech ). ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2/ She / ought/ work / hard / order / make / parents / happy. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3/ " Don't meet me after class, Nhi " said Tuan …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 4*. When she was younger, this hat was one of her favorites. ( favorite) This hat used ...........................................of hers when .......................................... 5. On Sundays he wants to go to bed late. ( Use " enjoy" instead of " want " ) ................................................................................................................................................... KEYS I/ Listening : (2 ms ) 1/ ran 2/ the egg 3/ cut open 4/ gold eggs 5/ finished 6/chickens * Script : The tape transcript in unit 5 - Listen . II/ Reading : ( 2.5 ms ) 1/ Answer the questions : a/ His pronunciation of English words was really bad and his English grammar was worse . b/ She told him how to use an English - English dictionary to improve his English grammar . c/ He won the first prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students his hometown one year later . 2/ Answer true or false : a/ T b/ F c/ T III/ Language focus : ( 3 ms ) A/ Choose the correct word : 1/ d. scissors 2/ Let me help you 3/ happily 4/ take 5/listening 6/ March 1931 7/ in 8/ pronounce 9/to make 10/in order to 11/ speaking 12/Don't touch IV/ Writing : ( 2.5 ms ) Rewrite the following sentences as directed : 1/ Her( Hoa's) mother said she (he) should do all her exercises before going to bed. 2/She ought to work hard (harder) in order to make her parents happy. 3/ Tasked Nhi not to meet him after class. 4/ This hat used to be favorite of hers when she was younger. 5/ On Sundays he wants to go to bed late..

(67)  Homework: - Practice writing a letter telling your parents about your future plan (page 58, 49) - Review the reading text in Unit 5 (Study Habits).Be ready for One period Test. . PERIOD 39 : ONE PERIOD TEST 2 A/ Aim : Ss do the test by themselves . B/ Teaching aids : Script [ tape, cassette player ] . C/ Procedure : NHẬN BIẾT TN. THÔNG HIỂU. TL 6 1.5. I/Listening II/ Reading 3 1.5 III/Language focus 6 1.5 IV/ Writing TỔNG 15 4.5 NAME:……………………………. CLASS: 8/………. TN. TL 3. 6. VẬN DỤNG TN. TL. 1.5. 1.5 5. 9. TỔNG. 3 5 ONE PERIOD TEST 2. 2.5 2.5. 6 6 12 5 26. 1.5 3 3 2.5 10.

(68) HỌ & TÊN : ........................................ BÀI KIỂM TRA 45 PHÚT - LẦN 2 Lớp : 8 / .... Môn : Tiếng Anh -A I. Nghe và điền vào mỗi khoảng trống sau: (1,5đ) Once a poor farmer lived a comfortable life with his (1)..................... . His chickens laid many eggs which the farmer (2)........................... to sell to buy food and clothing for his family. One day, he (3)........................... to collect the eggs and discovered one of the chickens laid a (4)........................... egg. He shouted excitedly to his wife : “we’re rich! We’re rich”. His wife (5)........................... to him and they both looked at the eggs in amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to cut open all the (6)........................... to find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. II. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn và làm những bài tập sau : Phong started learning English when he was in grade six. In his first year, he had difficulty in learning English. He didn't know how to learn vocabulary. His English grammar was bad, too. He used to get poor marks for English. One day his teacher of English ,Mrs Vi, took him to the school library and showed him different ways of learning words. She asked him to do grammar exercises in workbook. She also told good students in his class to help him with his homework. One year later his English was much better . "Now I'm in grade 8. I don't find English very difficult." He said. A. Viết ‘T’ cho câu đúng ; ‘F’ cho câu sai vào cuối câu sau : (1.5đ) 1. He started learning English when he was in grade six. ....................... 2. He is good at learning English in his first year . ....................... 3. His English got better after three months. ...................... B. Trả lời câu hỏi sau : (1.5 đ) 1. What subject did Cuong need to improve ? - ............................................................................ 2. What did Mrs Vi ask him to do ? - ............................................................................ 3. Did all of his classmates help him with his homework ? - ...................................................... III. Em hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng trong ngoặc : (3.0đ) 1. She is going to Da Lat ……………January . (on /in /at ) 2. I…………….on a farm when I was a young boy . (used to living /used live /used to live) 3. She said you ……………..work harder on English. (should /shall /are ) 4. Could you do me a favor ,please? ……………. . (Certainly / No / Not sure ) 5.The children enjoy .............. to traditional stories. (listen / to listen / listening) 6. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác với 3 từ còn lại : (find / kind / blind / live ) 7. ………………I help you ?- Yes. That’s very kind of you. (May / Need /Must ) 8. ................. time does she spend on history?-Half an hour a day. (What/ when/ How much) 9. We ................... a lot of rice for dinner last week. (eat/ ate/ eating) 10. We can participate ................... recycling program. (in / on / at) 11. He …….. me : ‘Why are you late ?’ . ( said / said to / told to ) 12 Which of the following wouldn’t you be likely to find in the post office ? (stamps / cakes / envelopes) IV. Viết câu theo các yêu cầu sau trong ngoặc: (2.5đ) 1. I often went swimming when I was a child. (Viết lại câu thứ 2 sao cho nghĩa không đổi) I used ..................................................................................................................... 2. Our class /going /clean /banks /Truong Giang River /weekends.(Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh) - ..................................................................................................................... 3. I look forward to hear from you soon . (Tìm lỗi sai rồi sửa lại cho đúng) - ..................................................................................................................... 4.I do my homework after dinner. (Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân) - ..................................................................................................................... 5. She is interested in telling jokes . (Viết lại câu thứ 2 sao cho nghĩa không đổi dung "enjoy") - She ..................................................................................................................... HỌ & TÊN : ........................................ BÀI KIỂM TRA 45 PHÚT - LẦN 2 Lớp : 8 / .... Môn : Tiếng Anh -B I. Nghe và điền vào mỗi khoảng trống sau: (1,5đ).

(69) Once a poor farmer lived a comfortable life with his (1)..................... . His chickens laid many eggs which the farmer (2)..........................to sell to buy food and clothing for his family. One day, he (3)..........................to collect the eggs and discovered one of the chickens laid a (4)........................... egg. He shouted excitedly to his wife : “we’re rich! We’re rich”. His wife (5)........................... to him and they both looked at the eggs in amazement. The wife wanted more, so her husband decided to cut open all the (6)........................... to find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. II. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn và làm những bài tập sau : There are many different ways of learning new words. Some learners write the words many times on a piece of paper to remember their spellings and the meanings. The others write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to know how to use the word in the right way. Some learners underline and highlight the new words they want to learn. This help them to remember important words in a sentence. However, when you learn words, you should review them. You can learn five words the first day and revise them the next day. This is very necessary because it helps you practice the words more times. Language learners should try different ways of learning words in order to find out the best way for themselves. A. Viết ‘T’ cho câu đúng ; ‘F’ cho câu sai vào cuối câu sau : (1.5đ) 1. Some learners write the words many times when they learn them. ………… 2. Some write example sentences with each word in order to remember important words. ………… 3. Underlining and highlighting the words help learners remember how to use words. ………… B. Trả lời câu hỏi sau : (1.5 đ) 1. Do learners learn words in different ways? - .................................................................. 2. Why do some learners write the words many times ? - .................................................................. 3. What is the necessary in learning words ? - .................................................................. III. Em hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng trong ngoặc : (3.0đ) 1. I'm going to visit Ha Long Bay ................... 10th January. (in / on / at) 2. I…………….on a farm when I was a young boy . (used to living /used live /used to live) 3. She said you ……………..work harder on English. (should / shall /are ) 4. Which of the following is not a mean of transport ? (coach / car / park) 5. ………………I help you ?- Yes. That’s very kind of you. (May / Need /Must ) 6. Chọn từ có cách phát âm khác với 3 từ còn lại : (find / kind / blind / live) 7. We can participate ................... recycling program. (in / on / at) 8. Could you do me a favor ,please? ……………. . (Certainly / No / Not sure ) 9. We ................... a lot of rice for dinner last week. (eat/ ate/ eating) 10. He asks me ....................... the books to his office . (take / to take / taking) 11. He …….. me : ‘Why are you late ?’ . ( said / said to / told to ) 12. ................. time does she spend on history?- Half an hour a day. (What/ when/ How much) IV. Viết câu theo các yêu cầu sau trong ngoặc: (2.5đ) 1. He said to me :"Can you help me with my English speaking?" (Đổi sang câu tường thuật) - ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. I often played blind man's bluff when I was a child . (Viết lại câu thứ 2 sao cho nghĩa không đổi) - I used ………………………………………………….. 3. He asked me put the flowers on the table . (Tìm lỗi sai rồi sửa lại cho đúng) - ................................................................................................................................................. 4. They collect and empty garbage at Tam Quang Market. (Đặt câu hỏi cho từ gạch chân) - ................................................................................................................................................ 5. Our class /going /clean /banks /Truong Giang River /weekends.(Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh) - ................................................................................................................................................... ANSWER KEY (A + B) I/ Nghe và điền vào mỗi khoảng trống sau: (1,5đ) ( đề A +B) (1) family (2) used (3) went (4) gold (5) ran (6) chickens ( ĐỀ A) II. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn và làm những bài tập sau : ( A. Viết ‘T’ cho câu đúng ; ‘F’ cho câu sai vào cuối câu sau : (1.5đ).

(70) 1. T 2. F 3. F B. Trả lời câu hỏi sau : (1.5 đ) a. Coung (He) needed to improve English. b. She asked him to do grammar exercises in workbook. c. No, they didn't. (only good students in his class ) III. Em hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng trong ngoặc : (3.0đ) 1. in 2. used to live 3. should 4. certainly 5. listening 6. live 7. May 8. how much 9. ate 10. in 11. said to 12. cakes IV. Viết câu theo các yêu cầu sau trong ngoặc: (2.5đ) 1. I used to go swimming when I was a child. 2. Our class is going to clean the banks of Truong Giang River on the weekend. 3. hear hearing 4. When do you do your homework? 5. She enjoys telling jokes. ( ĐỀ B) II. Em hãy đọc đoạn văn và làm những bài tập sau : ( A. Viết ‘T’ cho câu đúng ; ‘F’ cho câu sai vào cuối câu sau : (1.5đ) 1. T 2. F 3. F B. Trả lời câu hỏi sau : (1.5 đ) a. Yes , they do. b. some learners write the words many times to remember their spellings and the meanings. c. Revision is the necessary in learning words . III. Em hãy chọn 1 đáp án đúng trong ngoặc : (3.0đ) 1. on 2. used to live 3. should 4. park 5. May 6. live 7. in 8. certainly 9. ate 10. to take 11. said to 12. how much IV. Viết câu theo các yêu cầu sau trong ngoặc: (2.5đ) 1. He asked me to help him with his English speaking . 2.I used to played blind man's bluff when I was a child . 3. put to put 4. Where do they collect and empty garbage ? 5. Our class is going to clean the banks of Truong Giang River on the weekend.. . preparation 13 /11/2012. UN. MY NEIGHBORHOOD Period 40: Lesson 2 Getting Started , Listen & Read - P.63-64. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue and the present perfect tense. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know more about their neighborhood and about past participles, the present perfect. C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure: I/ GETTING STARTED :.

(71) Ss work in pairs matching the names of places with the pictures. Answer key: a) grocery b) stadium c) wet market d) drugstore e) hairdresser's swimming pool II/ LISTEN & READ : ( make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre-teach ; -Pancakes (n ) [picture] - close by = near here - to serve [ the ditto ] - tasty (adj) = delicious (adj) - too (tired) to cook [ translation ] - since (prep) [ translation]  Checking vocabulary: R O R. f). - to be - was/were - been (past participle) - to try (food) [ explanation]. 2. Setting the scene Introduce the 2 characters in the dialogue Nam and Na. Na is the newcomer. Ss listen to the tape (twice) 3. Grammar point : T elicits the sentence from Ss “ We’ve been here since last week” * Form: S + have/has + past participle. * Use: Talk about an action that began in the past and continues to present (the present perfect tense) Ex: She has lived in Tam Quang since 1990 . ® Choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs . 4. Exercises a. Complete the sentences  Give Ss 5 minutes to read the dialogue and find the word to fill complete the sentences. Answer key: a) new b) last week c) tired d) restaurant e) Hue f) pancakes b/ Answer the questions : a/ How long has Nam lived there ? b/ How long has Na lived there ? c/ Is Na ' mother too tired ? d/ What's the food like ? - Get Ss to work in pairs . - correction . HOMEWORK : Be ready for (SPEAK - p.48): Answer the questions 1-5 . Do exercises in workbook . Write a passage about their neighborhood . Prepare :speak + listen .  Date of preparation 20/11/2011. Period 41. Lesson 3. UNI. MY NEIGHBORHOOD Speak, Listen -P.64-66. A/ Aims: Talking about sending an item airmail or surface mail. Listening for specific information. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the language in the same situation and talk about "What's on TV". C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure:.

(72) Warm-up (Shark attack) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (POST OFFICE) A) SPEAKING : I / PRE-SPEAKING :. 1. Vocabulary: - a parcel [realia] - airmail [explanation] - surface mail [ the ditto ] - charge [ example] 2. Practice the dialogue (Choral repetition ® Half - Half ® Pairs) II. WHILE-SPEAKING:.  Ss use the information in the table to make the dialogues and practice in pairs. Surface mail (3) Airmail (3) Item Destination Weight Charges Weight Charges (1) (2) (4) (VND)(5) (4) (VND)(5) parcel Qui Nhon 5 kilograms 19,200 letter Kon Tum 20 grams 800 postcard Ho Chi Minh City 15 grams 1,200 parcel Ca Mau 2 13,000 kilograms. Example exchange: Clerk : Can I help you? Mrs Kim: I want to send this (1)_parcel_ to (2)_Qui Nhon_ Clerk: Do you want to sent it airmail or surface mail? Mrs Kim: (3)_surface mail_ please. How much is it? Clerk: I'll weigh it. It's (4)_five kilograms_ . That's (5)_19,200 dong_ . Mrs Kim: Here you are. Clerk: Thank you. Mrs.Kim: You're welcome.  T. walks round monitoring the class. Ss work in pairs . - Have two pairs speak out in front of the class . B. LISTENING : I/ .PRE LISTENING:. 1. Vocabulary: - a performance - to kick off = to start - an advertisement - a contest Millennium Cinema / Star Movies Channel / The Newcomer / Town Ground / Culture House  Exercise 1: Prediction - T. runs through the four advertisements on page 66 and gets the Ss to match the four phrases on page 56 with these 4 advertisements. - Ss guess - T. collects Ss 's predictions.

(73) II. WHILE LISTENING :.  Ss listen to the tape (twice or more) and check their predictions.  T. gets feedback from Ss and gives the correct answers (Key: A2 D4). B1. C3.  Exercise 2: T / F / NI (No Information)  Ss listen to the tape (twice or more) and do the exercise. (individual ® pair compare)  T. gets feedback from Ss and gives the correct answers ( Key: a) T b) NI c) F d) T f)NI ). e) T. III. POST LISTENING:.  Ss practice asking and answering the questions about what Na is going to do this weekend , using these questions : a/ Does Na like movies ? ( yes) b/ Why won't she go to see the film " The newcomer "? ( because she has seen it before ) c/ Will Na go to the soccer match with Nam and Minh ?( Yes, she Will . ……) HOMEWORK. :. - Be ready for read - Do exercises in workbook . -. Write " what's Na going to do " in notebook . . Date of preparation 24/11/2011. Period 42. UNI. MY NEIGHBORHOOD READ - P. 67-68. A/ Aims: Reading for details about a shopping mall..

(74) B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to answer comprehension questions. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: * Warm up : Guessing the words ( revision ) - Give the definitions and get Ss to find out the words as quickly as possible . 1. everything ? ( supermarket ) 2 A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit ? (Grocery store ) 3/ A place where you can buy books ? (Bookstore ) 4/ A place where you can come to eat ? ( Restaurant / Food store ) 5/A place where you can come to see the movies ? ( Movie theater ) 6/ A person who comes to the store and buy something ? ( A customer ) I/ PRE-READING:. 1. Pre teach : - a shopping mall - a selection - a roof - product (n) - a customer. ( explanation ) ( the ditto ) ( picture). (explanation ). - (to) take one's business - to be concerned about = to be worried about (revision) - to organize = to hold (a meeting) (the ditto ) 2. True/False prediction (Exercise 1, P.68) [ close the book ] - Set the scene : In Nam's neighborhood, there is a new shopping mall. - Ask Ss to predict these statements in the exercise 1. p.68 . - Ss guess ® T. collects Ss' s predictions. II. WHILE-READING : (. open the book )  Ss read the text (P. 57) and check their predictions in individual then share with a partner. Have Ss correct the false statements . Answer key: a) F (It is open daily. = seven days a week).

(75) b) F (There are fifty) c) F (Some people in the neighborhood are not happy about... ) d) T. e) T.  Ss read the text again and do Exercise 2 (P. 68):  Run through the questions (a-d) in Exercise 2 (P. 58). Give SS 5 minutes to read the text and answer them. (Individually work and pair-compare) Answer key: a) It is different from the present shopping area. All the shops are under one roof.... b) There are 50 air-conditioned specialty stores, 4 movie theaters, 10 restaurants, a children's play area. c) They think the new shopping mall will take their business. d) They offer a wider selection of products. III .POST-READING :. Discussion  Ask Ss to think about the convenience of the mall .  Get Ss to work in groups .  Brainstorming : * Possible answers : - wide selection of goods . - lower prices - buy many things at the same time . - have fun or relax while shopping . - customers don't care of the weather . - shop in comfort . HOMEWORK :. - Answer the questions:. a) Who are concerned about the new shopping mall? b) What will they do to discuss the. situation? - Be ready for(WRITING) - Do exercises in workbook . . Date of preparation 25/11/2011. Period 43:. U. MY NEIGHBORHOOD WRITE - P.68..

(76) A/ Aims: Writing a notice. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing and write the notice for their school or their class . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Check Ss' s homework by getting them to answer 2 questions given in previous lesson. I. PRE-WRITING:. 1. Pre-teach;. - an effect (translation) - a hardware store (example) - to contact ( explanation) 2/ Set the scene :the residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall..  Get Ss to read the notice and answer some questions to check their understanding .  Ss read the notice and answer the questions: a) Who hold the meeting?(Tran Phu residents and store owners ) b) What is the purpose of the meeting?( To discuss the effects of the new mall ) c) When is the meeting? ( On May 20 at 8 pm ) d) Where is the meeting? ( Binh' s Hardware store, 12 Hang Da Street ) e) Who is the person to contact? ( Pham Van Tai ) - Correction . II. WHILE-WRITING:. 68 .. Let Ss know the way to write a notice, not write full sentences .- Ask Ss to read passage 2 on page - Ss work in pairs . use the same questions above to guide Ss - Ss read the text and complete the notice. The School _________ _________ Club HOLDING A _________ _________ TO ____________ THE TEACHER'S DAY Date: ____________ Time: ____________ Place: _______________________________________________________ Please contact: ________________________________________________________. - Give the feedback .  Write one or two notices about your class meeting and/or your Sports Club meeting.(group work)  T. walks round the class and gives help. III. POST-WRITING: - Four groups stick their posters on the board . * Share and compare ® Correction * Ss work in groups of four, ask and answer about their class meeting using the above questions. HOMEWORK :. - Write the notice again . - Do exercises 1-5 on page 69-71.

(77) - Be ready for (LANGUAGE FOCUS) . . Date of preparation 28/11/2011. Period 44 :. UNI. MY NEIGHBORHOOD LANGUAGE FOCUS -P . 69-71.. A/ Aims: To practice forming the present perfect and compare it with past simple tense.

(78) To compare characteristic of things using structures with (not) as ... as; different from B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the present perfect with since and for and some adjectives to make comparisons. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , cards . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups . E/ Procedure: Warm up:  Have Ss work in two groups, each group writes five verbs.  Ss go to the board and write the past participles of 10 verbs.  T. gets feed back from Ss and gives Ss marks.  T. shows Ss how to form the past participle of regular verbs (add -ed to the infinitive) Exercise 3: (p. 69) * Presentation:  Set the scene : Na is new in Nam's neighborhood . They are talking to each other . - Give Ss an open dialogue between Nam and Na the ask them to complete it . Na : how long have you lived in this neighborhood ? Nam : I have lived here for ten years . Na: Really . It's a long time . - Ask Ss to repeat the dialogue and ask some Ss to practice in pairs . - Elicit the form from Ss .  Form : have/ has + Past participle./ haven't/ hasn't + PP / Have /Has + S + PP ?  Use : To talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present . We often use " Since and For " with the present perfect tense . * Practice: - Give the cues written on cards and ask Ss to make full sentences . - Ss work in groups and write on the posters then read in front of the class . - T gives feedback and correct their pronunciation . a/ I / live / here / last week . d/ They / attend/ Quang Trung school /last year . b/ We / not eat / in that restaurant / 2 years . e/ My dad/ work / for his company/ 20 years . c/ I /not see / her / yesterday . f/ Ba/ collect / stamps / 1995. Exercise 4: (p. 70)  Ss work in pairs filling in the gaps with the correct verb form.  T. corrects ® Answer key: 1. have been 2. hope. 3. have ... lived 5. want. 4. is 6.. looks 7. Have ... been 8. have seen  Ss practice the dialogue in pairs Exercise 5: (p. 71)  T. reminds Ss of the expressions: different from;(not) the same as ;(not) as + adj + as  Ss work in pairs looking at the pictures and use the words in the box to complete the sentences. (c - i).  T. corrects ® Answer key: c) not as/so cheap as. g) as long as d). the. same. as. h) not as modern as e) as cheap/expensive as i) not as/so cheap as.

(79) f) different from HOMEWORK :. - Do exercises in workbook .. - Be ready for Unit 8 (Getting Started, Listen & Read) . Date of preparation 30 /11/ 2011. un. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE.

(80) Period 45 :. Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.73-74 .. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue to understand the changes in the countryside. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about some differences between the countryside and the city C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs ,groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up: Making sentences using the present perfect tense with for and since. a. Nam's family / live / Hanoi / 10 years b. They / be / on holiday / last week c. We / be / in this school / 3 years d. The Robinsons / live / Hanoi / 1999 I. GETTING STARTED: Brainstorming Ss work in groups making a list of the differences between the countryside and the city. City Country noisy fresh air friendly tall buildings .................... II. LISTEN & READ :. ( make. ............. Ss interested in the new topic/theme). 1. Pre teach : - to hear - heard - heard but also - entertainment (n) accessible (adj)  Checking vocabulary .: R O R. - permanently (adv) - Medical facility (n). - remote (adj) - to prefer =To like better. - not only ... -. 2. Setting the scene : Introduce the 2 characters in the dialogue Hoa and Na. Na has been to Kim Lien village for the weekend. Now she and Hoa are talking about life in the country..  Ss listen to the tape and repeat (choral repetition) .( closed pairs - open pairs ) . T corrects their pronunciation . 3. Grammar point:. T elicits the sentence from Ss “ Things are changing in the countryside.” * Form: S + am/is/are + V-ing ( The present progressive tense) * Use: Talk about the future Ex: She is doing her homework tonight.

(81) 4. Exercises: .Answer the questions ( Ex 2 - p.73 )  Run through the questions (a - f).  Give Ss 8 minutes to read the dialogue and answer the questions  T. collects Ss 's answers and corrects Answer key:. a) Na has been to the countryside. (Kim Lien village) b) She was there for the weekend. (one day) c) The countryside is peaceful and quiet and there's nothing to do. d) There are no movie theaters, no parks, no zoos... e) Many remote areas are getting electricity. People can now have. things like refrigerators and TV. and medical facilities are more accessible .  Ss ask and answer the questions in pairs. HOMEWORK :. Be ready for (SPEAK ,LISTEN).Do exercises in workbook . Practice the dialogue again . .

(82) Date of preparation 2 /12 / 2011. UN. COUNTRY. LIFE AND CITY. LIFE Period 46:. Speak, Listen -P.73-74 .. A/ Aims: Talking about the changes of the places. Listening for details and revising how to express a future arrangement. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the changes in a place and listen to the short dialogue then fill in the gaps . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , Tape , Cassette player. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm-up (Brainstorming) polluted. quiet the city. the country A. SPEAKING I. PRE-SPEAKING:.  Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Hoa and Na again and ask them the question: "What does Nga say about the country nowadays?"  T. elicits the answers to the question: - Things are changing in the countryside. - Many remote areas are getting electricity. - Life in the provinces is changing for better.  Remind Ss of the use of the present progressive in this case: to show changes.( Using "get/ become") II. WHILE-SPEAKING;.  Give Ss 5 minutes to study the two pictures on page 73 and find out the differences. Then use the present progressive of the verb become or get to talk the changes..  Ss work in pairs talking about the changes. Ask Ss to think about: The streets / (cleaner/wider /noisier) ® The streets are getting cleaner. The traffic / (busier). The houses / (more modern/ beautiful ).

(83) There is/are more (trees / ...................) The town / beautiful . There / many tall buildings and houses. Goods/ expensive.  T. walks round listening to the Ss speaking to each other and giving immediate help. T. get some Ss to give their answers to the whole class III. POST-SPEAKING: (If. there is enough time )  Ss work in groups of 4 talking about the changes in the neighborhood.. B. LISTENING: I .PRE-LISTENING:.  Set the scene :( use the picture on page 74 ) " Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the phone . She's coming to visit Lan in Ha Noi .".  Prediction  Ss read the incomplete conversation and try to think of the words to fill in the gaps.  T. collects Ss' s predictions II. WHILE-LISTENING:.  Ss listen to the tape (twice or more) and check their predictions individually.  Ss compare their answers with their partner .  T. gets feedback from Ss and gives the correct answers. Answer key: 1) that 2) this 3) It's 4) Where 5) from 6) coming 7) week 8) arriving 9) Thursday 10) late 11) afternoon 12) speak 13) my 14) get III. POST-LISTENING:.  Ss practice the conversation in pairs . HOMEWORK :-. Write about the changes in your hometown.. -Do exercises in workbook . -Write 5 sentences using present progressive tense about what you are doing next week . - Be ready for (READ) .. .

(84) Date of preparation 3/12 / 2011. UNIT. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE. UNIT 8 Period 47:. READ -P. 75 .. A/ Aims: Reading the text about life in the country and in the city to understand the main idea. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand why many people are leaving their home in the country to go and live in the city and the problems these people cause. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups. E/ Procedure: Warm up : Jumbled words : - fulentipl. plentiful. ; taneru. nature ; roestdy. - viroped. provide. ; laputipoon. destroy ; ciliestiaf. facilities ;. population .. I. PRE-READING:. 1. Pre teach: - rural (adj)  urban (adj) - overcrowding (n) (explanation ) - a typhoon ( synonym/ explanation) - flood (n) ( example/ picture) - to cause = to create ( translation) - to migrate = to emigrate - a drought (picture ) 2. Guiding question: Why are many people in the country moving the city?  Ss work in pairs to make a list of reasons (they can talk in Vietnamese) - to find jobs - because city life is better - to get a better education - ........................................ II. WHILE-READING;.  Ss read the text (P. 75) and check their answers (add some more reasons from the text) Matching A B -electricity supply đương đầu - well-paying job - to face - to increase - a struggle with nature - live apart - put a strain on. gia tăng sự cung cấp điện sống xa cách nhau dẫn đến quá tải cuộc đấu tranh với thiên nhiên công việc được trả lương cao.  Ss read the text again and do Exercise 1 (Complete the summary by filling in the gaps)  Ss work individually then pair-compare Answer key: 1. leaving 2. home 3. city 4. rural 5. city 6. problems 7. schools 8. hospitals problem 10. world  Ss read the text again and do Exercise 2 (Finding similar words)  Ss work individually then pair-compare Answer key: a. rural b. plentiful c. increase f. urban. d. strain. 9.. e.. tragedy.

(85) III. POST-READING:.  Ss discuss why many people are leaving their home in the country to go and live in the city and the problems these people cause. Ask Ss to work in groups (8-10) and discuss.  Have Ss write their answers on the posters.  Ask 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas before the class . HOMEWORK :. Do exercises 1,2 in the workbook . Write 5 things that the government should do for the rural areas ( build streets , theaters, stadiums…. ) Be ready for (REVISION ) .. .

(86) Date of preparation 5/ 12/ 2011. U. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Period 48 :. WRITE - P . 76 .. A/ Aims: Writing a letter to a friend about their neighborhood . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, cards . D/ Ways of working: Individuals , pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check- up: - 2 Ss talk about the advantages and disadvantages about living in the city . I. PRE-WRITING:. - T asks some questions : + How many parts are there in a letter ? + What are they ? - Ss answer  Ordering. : ( prepare 6 cards with 6 outlines on them. Put in a random order .). Ss put the outline of an informal letter in the correct order: ___ a. Opening: Dear .........., ___ b. Closing: With love / Your friend / With best wishes ___ c. Heading: The writer's address / Date ___ d. Body of the letter Ss work in individual and then compare with a partner . * Feedback T corrects Answer key: 1c 2a 3d 4b  Give Ss 10 minutes to answer 8 questions on page 76 . Ss work in pairs . Move around and give the help . Ss should take notes the information they gather . - Correction . II. WHILE-WRITING:.  Give Ss 15 minutes to write a letter to one of their friends. Ask them to follow the outline of an informal letter and put the answers together (use linking words if possible) . Ss work in individual .  T moves around the class and takes notes of Ss 's mistakes or provides help if necessary. III. POST-WRITING:.  Ss swap the letters to help each other find mistake and do the correction.  Ask to show some typical mistake to the whole class. HOMEWORK :. - Do the exercise 3 ,4,5 on page 77-79. - Write the correct letter on their notebooks. - Be ready for (LANGUAGE FOCUS) .

(87) Date of preparation 5/12/2011. UNIT. COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFE Period 49: A/ Aims:. LANGUAGE FOCUS -P. 77-79 .. Using the present progressive to talk about plans according to the timetable. Further practice in comparatives and superlatives, in talking about the changes. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about plans according to the timetable. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard. D/ Ways of working: Individuals E/ Procedure: Exercise 1: (P. 77) T help Ss go through some new expressions from the table : time of departure / time of arrival/ status / origin / revised time ) , then models the dialogue first . Ss practice the dialogue (choral repetition ® half - half ® pairs)  Ss use the shipping information to make similar dialogue and practice in pairs.  T. asks some pairs to talk as modeling. Exercise 2: (P.78)  Ss complete the dialogues with the verb in the progressive tense.  Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends.  T. corrects  Ss practice the dialogues in pairs Exercise 3:(P.78)  Ss complete the sentences using is/are getting (becoming) + an adjective from the box. (Ss work individually the compare with their friends)  T. collects Ss 's answer and corrects. Answer key: b) ...... are getting (becoming) weak d) ...... is getting ( becoming) cold c) ...... is getting ( becoming) dark e) ...... are getting (becoming) better f) ...... is getting ( becoming) cleaner Exercise 4: (P.79)  Ss make comparisons between the city and the country about some things .  T. makes it easier for Ss to do this exercise by giving them more cues as below( Ss work in pairs ) - Food in the city _is more expensive than_ food in the country. - Traffic in the city ______________________ traffic in the country. - Schools in the country aren't ______________________ schools in the city. - Schools in the city are _______________________ schools in the country. - Transport .................................................................................................... - Medical facilities .........................................................................................  Ask Ss to compare their answers with their friends.  T. corrects Exercise 5: (P.79)  Ss make sentences comparing the house, the villa and the apartment. Use the adjectives given in the box.  Ask Ss to compare the age (old), the area (big/small), the price (expensive/cheap).

(88) Example: (big) The villa is bigger than the apartment, but the house is the biggest. 1. (old) The ___________ is older than the _______________,but the _______________ is __________ . 2.(expensive)The house is ________ than the __________ , but the __________ is __________ . Homework:. Review all units from unit 1 to unit 8. Write 5 sentences comparing their house with their neighborhood . .

(89) Date of preparation 7/12/2011. Period 50,51,52,53 :. REVISION FOR END OF FIRST TERM TEST  A/ Aims: - To Revise language focus learned (vocabulary , grammar, language functions .) +Tenses : present simple, past simple , present progressive , present perfect , expressing the idea in the future +Adverbs of manner , adverbs of time . + Structure : ( not) + adj + enough + to-inf ………. - Revise the skills : reading , writing . B/ Objective : Ss can remember all the grammar points , vocabulary , and do the test rightly . C/ Teaching aids : textbook, posters . D/ Ways of working : Individual, pairs, groups . E/ Procedure : A) LANGUAGE FOCUS : I/ Vocabulary : Brainstorming / Networks : - Have Ss work in groups and write on the board . - The whole class correct and T gives the marks for the winners . + Words describing house and home . + Names of telecommunication devices : + Words describing appearance , characters , hair . + Words to talk about chores. + Words to talk about study habits . + Words to talk about future plans . + Words to talk about how to learn English . + Words to talk about neighborhood . + Words describing country / city life . II/ Grammar and language functions : 1/ TENSES: a/ Present simple : - T gives the situations and asks Ss to remind of the form and use :  Form : (Be) (+) S + is/am /are … (--) S + isn't / am not/ aren't … ( ?) Is/ Am/ Are + S + …….? (O. V ) (+) S + V / V es /s +…. (--) S + don't / doesn't + V- inf + …. ( ?) Do /Does + S + V- inf + ….? - Have Ss write 2 sentences about them .  Use : - To talk about general truths . b/ Simple past : - T elicits the form and the use from Ss .  Form : (Be) (+) S +was /were … (--) S + wasn't / weren't … ( ?) Was/ Were + S + …….? (O. V ) (+) S + V-ed / V2 +…. (--) S + didn't + V- inf + …. ( ?) Did + S + V- inf + ….?  Use : We use the past simple for something in the past, something which is finished .( yesterday, ago, yesterday+ morning/ evening…, in 1998 , last + N ……) c/ Present perfect :  Form (+) S + have / has + p.p.

(90) (--) S + haven't / hasn't + P.P + …. ( ?) Have /Has + S + P.P + ….? - Have Ss write 2 sentences about them .  Use : - The present perfect tells us about the past and the present . d/ Present progressive :  Form (+) S + is / am / are + V-ing (--) S + isn't / am not / aren't + V-ing + …. ( ?) Is / Am / Are + S +V-ing + ….?  Use : - To talk about the future . - To show changes with "get " , "become" . e/ To talk about intentions with " be going to " . Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form or tense. 1. Nga and Lan ________ (see) a movie tonight. 2. Sue can _________ (speak) Vietnamese very well. 3. Mozart _________ (write) more than 600 pieces of music. 4. ‘How _______ you _______ (learn) to drive?’ ‘My father ______ (teach) me. 5. We usually ______ (go) to the library three times a week, but last week we _______ (go) twice. 6. Alexander Graham Bell _______ (introduce) the telephone in 1876. 7. Yesterday I _______ (be) busy, so I _______ (not/ have) time to phone you. 8. ‘What _______ you _______ (do) next summer vacation?’ 9. ‘I _______ (visit) my grandparents in Nha Trang. 10. Would you like ______ (come) to dinner tomorrow?. 11. We (go) ________ to Ha Long Bay this weekend. 12. You (used) ____ to play so much when you (live) ____in the countryside? 13. My former teacher was Miss. Smith. I (study) _____ with him for six months. 14. I (work) ______ him since 1970. 15. How long _____ you (learn) ______ English? 16. _______ you (meet) _______ him since we (say) ______ good-bye? 2/ Adverbs of manner, adverbs of place : a/ Adverbs of manner : - Ask Ss to remind of the form and tell the positions in a sentence .  Form : Adj + Ly Adv . - Get SS to tell some irregular adverbs such as : fast , early , hard , straight , … and the positions of adjectives. Exercises: Choose the right word in brackets to complete each sentences. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Our team won the game because we played very _________ (good/ well). I tried on the shoes and they fitted me_________ (perfect/ perfectly). He had an accident because he was driving too _________ (fast/ fastly). Tom is a ________ driver He is driving __________along the narrow road. (careful/ carefully) Do you usually feel _________ (nervous/ nervously) before examination.. .. b/ Adverbs of place : here , there , outside , inside , upstairs , downstairs .. Exercises: Choose the right word in brackets to complete each sentences. 1) Nam isn’t upstairs. He’s ( from/ outside/ on). 2) Don't go _____ . It's too cold. ( outside / inside /away / into) 3/ Structure : Enough - T says :" Hoa is not old enough to drive a car . " - Ss remind a structure : S + be ( not ) + adj + enough + (for + O ) + to-inf . - T helps Ss combine two sentences using "enough " . - The exercises in workbook . ]. Exercises: I/ Combine each of the following pairs of sentences into one sentence, using (not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive. 1. My sister is old. She can drive a car.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. She is beautiful and intelligent. She can become Miss World..

(91)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. Mr. Robinson isn’t rich. He can’t buy a house.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. The worker is clever. He can make fine things from wood.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. II. Make complete sentences from the words given below. 1. They/ be/not/ strong / lift / these bags.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. He/ be/ old/ enough/ go/ school.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. He/ not/ old enough/ watch/ this film.  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4/ Reflexive pronouns : - Have Ss go to the board and write the reflexive pronouns . - Ss tell their positions in a sentence . -I myself ; I and my friends ourselves ; She herself ; He - Nam and Tuan themselves ; …….. himself .. Exercises: Fill in each blank with a correct reflexive pronoun. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.. My sister often looks at _______ in the mirror. Mark made _______ a sandwich. This refrigerator defrosts _______. Hoa and I ________ saw that accident yesterday. Did you pay for _______? The children can look after _______ for a few days.. 5/ Reported speech : ( commands , requests and advices ) - Get Ss to remind the structures then write on the board . - Give the situations and ask Ss to rewrite using reported speech . * Commands , requests : S + asked/told / requested …+ O + ( not ) + to-inf . * Advice : S + said (to + O ) ( that) + S + should + V-( bare-inf ) + ….. Exercises: I/ Put the following commands, requests and advices into reported speech. 1. Their mother said to them, “Don’t make so much noise.” 2. The traffic policeman said, “Show me your driving license, please.” 3. Mrs. Jackson said to Tim, “Could you give me a hand, please?” 4. The lifeguard said, “Don’t swim out too far, boys.” 5. Nam said to the taxi driver, “Please turn left at the first traffic light.” 6. The doctor said to him, “You should give up smoking.” 7. The dentist said to me, “You shouldn’t eat too much sugar.” II/ Write sentences with the cues words.. 1. She /tell/ me /give /you / this dictionary. 2. her father / say / she / come / home / early . 3. they / ask / me / do / homework / before / go / school . 4. his teacher / say / he / improve / listening skill. 6/ Gerunds : ( V-ing ) * Standing after some verbs : finish , avoid, enjoy , practice , deny , try , like , dislike , keep, mind , miss, suggest , advise , understand , can't help , can't stand , …. * Standing after some prepositions : kook forward to , insist on , surprised at , be interested in , be busy with , be excited about , …. Exercises: Complete the sentences, using ing form of the verbs in the box. go out/ work/ have/ read/ play/ watch/ see/ write/ listen 1. Mel suggested _______ for a meal. 2. I started ______ in this office when I was seventeen. 3. We like _______ television on winter evenings..

(92) 4. I remember ______ afraid of the dark as a young child. 5. I love ______ a good book. 6. I prefer _______ a shower to a bath. 7. I had to stop ________ tennis when I hurt my back. 8. Do you enjoy _______ to museum? 9. We miss ______ all our friends. 10. After I moved away, we continued _______ to each other for many years. 7/ Modal verbs : may, can , could , should , have to , …. Using in asking for a favor - responding for favors ; offering assistance - responding to assistance . - Give some exercises and have Ss work in pairs . 8/ Prepositions of time : - Ask Ss to remind of the prepositions of time they learnt and then tell their uses . - T can use the brainstorming . Ss work in two groups . on. Prepositions of time. in At. 9/ To tell / ask somebody (not) to do something . 10/ " used to " (+) S + used to + V-inf . (--) S + didn't + use to + V-inf . ( ?) Did + S + use to + V-inf ..? B/ SKILLS : I/ Reading : - Read a dialogue or a passage about topics learnt to answer the questions , choose true (T) or False (F) . - Choose the words given to complete the passage or a text ( 8 - 10 gaps ). II/ Writing : - Revise the writings learnt in textbook . -Write the complete sentences using the words or phrases given . - Rewrite the second sentence so that the meaning stays the same the first ( Rewrite the sentences in reported speech beginning shown ) . C/ EXERCISES : @ SAMPLE TEST 1 : I/ Điền vào khoảng trống bằng một từ hoặc(các từ) trong ngoặc ở cuối mỗi câu: 1. We must be there _______________ 8.30 and 8.45. ( at / before / between / after ) 2. Dad stayed at the office ____________ he finished the report. (before / until / for / during ) 3. They are not _____________ to drive cars. (enough young / young enough / enough old / old enough) 4. When my uncle was young, he used ______ fishing on Sundays. (go/ went / going / to go) 5. Jane is _______________ beautiful than her sister. ( as / like / the most / more ) 6. I like _______________ the piano. ( playing / plays / played / play ) 7. We have learned English _______________ 2002. ( from / in / since / for ) 8. She asked me _______________ her a book. ( giving / to give / gave / given ) II/ Đọc đoạn văn sau và xem các câu về đoạn văn đúng hay sai. Viết T(true) cho câu đúng,F(false) cho câu sai: Language learners learn words in different ways. Some learners make a list and put into it the meanings of new words in their mother tongue, and try to learn them by heart. However, others do not. Instead, they write one or two example sentences with each new word in order to remember how to use the word in the right way. Many other learners only learn new words that are important Trả lời 1. Some language learners write the meaning of new words in their mother tongue. T 2. Some learners write examples of words they want to learn. 3. Language learners learn words in the same way. 4. Many learners only learn new words that are important. III/ Dùng từ hoặc(các từ) gợi ý đề viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh.

(93) Ex: She / like / learn English. 1. She / tall / than / her sister. 2. Wait / me / outside / school.. ® She likes learning English. ® ____________________________________________. ® ____________________________________________. IV/ Ghép câu yêu cầu được giúp đỡ và đưa ra đề nghị giúp đỡ ở cột A cho phù hợp với câu trà lời ở cột B A 1. Could you do me a favor? 2. May I help you? 3. I need a favor. 4. Let me help you. 1/ __b__. 2/ ____. B a. Yes. That's very kind of you. b. I'm sorry. I'm really busy. c. How can I help you? d. No. Thank you. 3/ ____ . 4/ ____. SAMPLE TEST 2 I.Chọn từ/cụm từ trong số A,B,C hay D để hoàn thành câu 1. My younger brother isn’t old enough to feed___________ . A. myself B. herself C. himself D. yourself 2 . Lan went to class late this morning because she _______ late. A. gets up B. got up C. getting up D. get up 3. Our grandmother used to _________us stories. A .tell B .tells C. telling D. old 4 .________have you lived here ?-We lived here since 1997. A. When B. Where C. How often D. How long 5. She has learnt English ________three years. A. about B. in C. during D. for 6. My brother hates ____________ soccer. A. playing B. played C. to play D. plays 7. __________did Tim study this semester ?-Very well. A. What B. How C. Why D. Who 8.A black and white T. V is not _________a color T. V A. as modern than B. more modern than C. as modern as D. more modern as III.Tìm một từ/cụm từ không cùng chủ điểm với 3 từ còn lại trong nhóm 1. a refrigerator a dish rack a wardrobe an electric stove 2. watching TV washing the dishes sweeping the floor feeding the pigs 3. tall buildings traffic jams beautiful views shopping malls III. Đọc đoạn văn sau và làm bài tập A và B bên dưới My name is Minh .I am a student of grade 8.I go to school in the afternoon from Monday to Saturday I often do my homework in the evening. At home nobody can help me with my homework. I am good at Math and Physics but I am not very good at Chemistry and Biology so I spend more time these subjects. Every day I spend half an hour on Biology and an hour on Chemistry. I also need to improve my English and History. I often ask my friends to help me with my English exercises..

(94) In my free time I often read or play volleyball with my school friends. I love playing volleyball but I hate basketball. A. Trả lời 3 câu hỏi sau 1. How many days a week does Minh go to school ? 2. Who helps Minh with his homework ? 3. What does Minh often do in his free time ? B. Viết T(true) sau câu đúng / F(false)sau câu sai theo nội dung đoạn văn 1. Minh spends more time on Biology than on Chemistry. ............ 2. He is not very good at English and History. ............ 3. He never takes part in any sports activities. ............ IV. Điền thêm từ để hoàn chỉnh các câu tường thuật sau 1. ”Can you carry my bag ?”  Yen asked Long _____________________________ . 2 .”Can you wait for me ?”  Lan asked Nam _____________________________ . 3 .”Please answer my question “  Mr Tri told Hoa __________________________ .  SAMPLE TEST 3 : I/ Chọn từ đúng trong ngoặc để hoàn thành câu ( 4đ ) 1. When I was young , I used ……………. Swimming in the river . ( go / to go / went / going ) 2. We must be there……………..7.30 and 8.15 . ( at / before / between / after ) 3. I……………….. do my homework every day .( ought / can / must / has to ) 4. The little boy is not …………………… to lift the suitcase. ( enough strong / strong enough / as strong as/ so strong ) 5. Hoa hates ……………………… to classical music . ( listens/ listened / listen / listening ) 6. Last night I watched the movie : " Romeo and Juliet" . At last they kill …………………………. ( himself / themselves / herself / ourselves ) 7. She told me …………………… you that present . ( giving / to give / gave / given ) 8. Vietnamese language is different …………………. English language . ( as / like / from / with ) II/ Hãy nối câu đề nghị ở cột A và câu trả lời đúng ở cột B : A 1. Could you help me , please ? 2. May I help you ? 3. Would you like to meet Nam ? 4. It's a pleasure to meet you .. B a. I'd love , too. b. The pleasure is all mine . c. Yes. That's very kind of you . d. I'm sorry . I'm really busy .. Answers: 1+………………; 2+……………;3+………………….; 4+…………………… III/ Đọc đoạn văn sau rồi xem các tình huống bên dưới T (true) hay F ( false ) . ( 2.5 đ) Alexander Graham Bell was born in Scotland in 1847 , but when he was a young man of twenty - three he moved with his parents to Canada . Before the year was over , young Graham had left his family and gone to Boston . Though Bell was a dreamer , he was also a practical thinker and a man of action . In Boston , where he worked by day as a teacher of the deaf, he worked far into the night experimenting with the electrical transmission of the sound . This led to the invention of the telephone . * T (true) or F ( false) statements : 1. Alexander .G. Bell was born in England . …………………… 2. He emigrated to Canada in 1865 . ………………… 3. Graham Bell worked with deaf in Boston . ……………………… 4. He experimented with the electrical transmission of the sound by day ……………………. 5. Graham Bell invented the telephone ……………………………. IV/ Dùng các từ đã cho để viết đoạn văn miêu tả về căn phòng của Hoa This/ Hoa 's bedroom . There/ desk/ on the left / room . On/desk/ there/ many folders/and/above/desk/bookshelf..

(95) There/ bed/ near/ desk On the right side / room/ there/ window There/ wardrobe/ beside/ window . This is Hoa 's bedroom . ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… …. SAMPLE TEST 4 : I/ Chọn đúng từ hoặc cụm từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu sau (4đ) . 1. You'll………..cook dinner yourself . ( has to/ must/ should / have to ) 2. They'll arrive…………Monday , 14 July ( in / at / during / on ) 3. Don't go …………. It's too cold . ( outside / inside / into / away ) 4. When my mother was young ,she used …………very well.(sing/ to sing / sang/ singing) 5. Nam hates …………to the market .( to go / goes / going / go ) 6. Tom is 16 . He isn't ……………to drive a car .(enough young/ young enough/ enough old/ old enough ) 7. Mai is …………...beautiful than her sister .( as /like / the most / more ) 8. What's ……………..film you've ever seen ? ( good /better / the best / well ) II/ Cho thì hoặc dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc :(1.5 đ) 1. Lan ought………..(practice) her English more frequently . 2. Nam's father ( work)…………… in this company since 1998 . 3. She is studying hard in order to (pass)……………..the final exam. III/ Kết hợp các động từ ở cột A với các từ hoặc cụm từ ở cột B .(1đ ) A. B. 1. tidy a. in a form 2. plant b. a bike 3. fix c. a room 4. raise d. funds 5. fill e. flowers 1 +………………….; 2 +………………….; 3 + ……………………; 4 + ………………………… IV/ Đọc đoạn văn , sau đó trả lời các câu hỏi bên dưới (2đ) How Nam has improved his English " … In the first year of lower secondary school I had some difficulties in learning English . My pronunciation of English words was really bad and my English grammar was worse . I did not know how to improve them . One afternoon after the lesson , my teacher of English told me to wait for her outside the classroom. She took me to the school library and showed me cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase . She also told me how to use an English- English dictionary to improve my English grammar . " Now I think you know what you should do " , said she . I made much progress and only one year later I won the first prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students in my hometown ." * Câu hỏi : 1. What difficulties did Nam have in learning English in the first year ? 2. Who wanted to meet him one afternoon after the lesson ? 3. What did the teacher showed him ? . 4. What did she tell him to improve his English grammar ?. 5. What did he win one year later ? * Put true (T) or false (F) : a) In the first year, both his pronunciation of English words and his English grammar were bad. b) After that , Nam and his teacher went to the public library …………………. c)The teacher showed him cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in the glass bookshelf . V/ Dùng các từ gợi ý in nghiêng đã cho để hoàn tất các câu sau sao cho ý nghĩa tương ứng với câu trước . ( 1,5 đ ) 1. " Don't walk on the grass , '" the gardener said to us . ( told ) The gardener…………………………………………………………………………..

(96) 2. Lan was in the USA 2 years ago . ( for 2 years ) . Lan …………………………………. 3. I'm quite tall but you are taller . ( as…as ) . I'm…………………………………………... SAMPLE TEST 5 : I./Circle the best option A, B, C or D to complete each of the following sentences.( 2.5 m ) 1. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently. A. wanted B. started C. helped D. needed 2. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. A. between B. report C. happy D. enough 3. I'm going to Laos _____ February 2012. A. at B. in C. on D. after 4. Don't go _____ . It's too cold. A. outside B. inside C. away D. into 5. Tom is 16. He isn’t _____ to drive a car. A. enough young B. young enough C. enough old D. old enough 6. He is studying hard _____ pass the first exams. A. for B. in order to C. so as D. so that 7. Mary likes _____ the piano. A. playing B. plays C. played D. play 8. She told me _____ you that present. A. giving B. to give C. gave D. given 9. Last night I watched the movie “Romeo and Juliet”. In the end, they killed______. A. himself B. herself C. themselves D. ourselves 10. Jane is _____ beautiful than her sister.. A. as. B. like. C. the most. D. more. II./ Match the best response in B with a sentence in A : (1 m) A B 1. Could you do me a favor ? a) Congratulations! 2. Shall I explain it to you ? b) Sure. What can I do for you. 3. I've passed my exam. c) How about going to the cinema? 4. What shall we do this evening ? d) No. Thanks. III. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets: (1 m) 1) Lan is living in Hanoi with her grandmother. She _____ here for two weeks. ( live) 2) There _____ an accident at this corner yesterday. (be) 3) You mustn't walk in the rain. You _____ wet. (get) 4) He is very humorous but sometimes his jokes _____ his friends. ( annoy) IV. Read the passage, then do exercises below: Lan is excited about the interesting activities she is going to do. The Y & Y is having a plan to help the community. She will participate in its recycling programs. In joining this program, she will collect glass, used paper and empty cans. Then she will send them for recycling. She hopes she can save natural resources and raise some money for her school Y &Y in these activities. She also thinks about participating in either planting trees and flowers or helping the street children. It is really interesting, isn’t it? 1/ Answer the questions : ( 1.5 ms a) Is Lan going to have interesting activities? b) What will she do? c) What will she send for recycling? d) What does she hope in these activities? V. Choose the given words to complete the following passage. afford/ baby-sister/ kitchen/ look/ middleclass/ proud/ returning/ things/ washing/.

(97) whenever I really feel obliged in helping my mother, ______ (1) she asks me to do so. We are a _____ (2) family with parents and only two children. My father is drawing a small salary and so we can’t _____ (3) to have a servant to help in the _____ (4) and the housework. In the afternoon after ______ (5) from school, I help my mother in her ______ (6). Sometimes she asks me to go to the shop to buy ______ (7); but most of the time I act as a ______ (8). My brother is an eight-month old boy. Most of the time I ______ (9) after my younger brother, so my mother can do her work. I really feel _______ (10) that I am helping my mother.. IV. Read the passage below and then answer the questions. Angela Duffy is a schoolgirl from Liverpool. She wants to be a doctor. “I am going to medial school next year. It’s a long course – about six years – but I’m going to work very hard. It is a difficult job, but I like working with people, and I like the idea of working in a caring profession. “She says that later she would like specialize and perhaps be a vet. “I love animals, and looking after them would be wonderful.” Angela’s sister is studying marketing at university. She enjoys traveling, and would probably like to work for a tour company. “I’m not sure yet exactly what I want to do. After university, I’m going to have a year off, and I’m going round the world with another girl. We hope to find a work on the way.” (specialize : trở thành chuyên gia; a vet: bác sĩ thú y) 1) How long is Angela going to study at the medical school?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2) Is working as a doctor hard work?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3) Why does Angela want to be a vet?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4) What does Angela’s sister do?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 5) Who is she going round the world with?  …………………………………………………………………………………….. VI./Rewrite these following sentences as directed 1. Her teacher / ask / spend / time / do homework. (make sentence) ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 2. My father often sang very well when he was young . (use used to) My father …………………………………………………………………………… 3. “Don’t wait for me if I'm late.” said Nga ( use reported speech)  Nga……………………………………………………………………………….. 4. Minh is young. He can’t drive a car ( use enough)  Minh ……………………………………………………………………………………… 5. They intend to visit their grandparents at Christmas.  They are going……………………………………………………………………………. VI. Write sentences. Say what the people are going to do. 1. My uncle has won some money. (buy a new car)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 2. They received a wedding present from their pen pal friend, Nick. (write a letter to thank him)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. I’ll have an annual holiday next month. (visit Ha Long Bay)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. My father has a bad cough. (stop smoking)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. Linh is studying medicine. (be a doctor)  …………………………………………………………………………………….. VII. Make complete sentences from the words given below. 3. He/ be/ old/ enough/ go/ school.. …………………………………………………………………… 4. It/ be/ cold/ go out. …………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. She/ be/ nice girl/ long hair. …………………………………………………………………………… 6. He/ be/ friendly/ kind/ everyone. …………………………………………………………………...

(98) 7. His hair/ short/ black. ……………………………………………………………………… 8. What/ your teacher/ like? ………………………………………………………………………. 9. He/ be/ not/ sociable/ as/ his brother. ………………………………………………………… 10. We/ not/ go/ school/ Saturdays.. ………………………………………………………… 11. They/ usually/ hold/ party/ New Year’s Eve.. ………………………………………………………… 12. I/ going/ see/ John/ lunchtime.. ………………………………………………………………………. 13. Last night/ she/ come home/ 10.30 and 11 o’clock.. ………………………………………………… VIII. Read the situations and complete the sentences, using the words in brackets. 1. Hoa and Tim are both 13 years old. (the same age…as). Tim is ………….. age……………………. 2. She speaks English very well, and her sister speaks well, too. (as…as). She speaks ….………her sister. 3. They like spaghetti; but I like hamburger. (different form). Their tastes are ……………………………. 4. They’ve lived here for a long time but we’ve lived here longer. (as…as). They haven’t………………... 5. He is wearing a red cap, and she is wearing a red cap too. (like). He is …………………………… hers. 6. My birthday is 12 August. Tom’s birthday is 12 August. (the same as). My birthday is …………Tom’s. HOMEWORK: Do all the exercises again. Be ready for the first term examination ..

(99) PERIOD 54 :. THE FIRST TERM EXAMINATION Time : 45'.

(100) Date of preparation 2/ 1 /2012. UN. A FIRST-AID COURSE. Getting Started , Listen & Read - P.80,81. Period 55. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue about the situations which require first-aid. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to give some first-aid instructions C/ Teaching aids: Pictures, Textbooks, Tape and cassette player, Blackboard D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs E/language content : - Words : the words relating to the first aid . - Grammar : promises , polite requests . F/ Procedure: I- Pre teach - to have a burn (explanation) unconscious (adj) - to have a nose bleed (the ditto) (explanation) - to have a bee sting (translation) (picture/realia) - the wound (example) - medicated oil (picture/realia) - an emergency (explanation) (translation) - to fall (fell) off (picture)  Checking vocabulary: R. O .R. - conscious (adj)  -. to bleed. - a bandage - to hurt = to injure - the condition - an ambulance. II-.GETTING STARTED.  Run through the situations which require first aid and the pictures on page 80 ( emergency room, medicated oil, water pack, sterile dressing, ice, alcohol .)- T may give more words : a towel, a hanker chief, tiger balm, cotton balls . …  Ss work in group of four or five, discuss and write down what they would do in the situations mentioned on page 80  T. elicits the answers from Ss and corrects . Example: When a boy has a burn on his arm, should we put cool water on the burn? - To ease the pain with (cold water / ice, ... ) - To cover the wound with (a bandage, a handkerchief ... ) - To apply medicated oil / cream ,... on the wound. III-.LISTEN& READ. (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme). 1. Setting the scene Lan is phoning Bach Mai Hospital to ask for an ambulance. A friend of hers hurt herself and had a bad cut bleeding badly..

(101)  Have Ss listen to the tape (or to the teacher )reading the dialogue and repeat (some difficult sentences )  Ss listen and repeat in chorus, open pairs (some pairs) - T corrects their pronunciation . - closed pairs . 2. Grammar point T elicits the sentences from Ss “ Will you hurry, please ?”-“Of course” “I promise I’ll keep her awake” * Form: Will you....?/ I promise I will...... * Use: Modal will to make requests, promises. 3. Exercises  T. runs through the topics covered in the dialogue (a - g).  Give Ss 8 minutes to read the dialogue and select () the topics covered in the dialogue.  T. collects Ss' s answers and corrects ® Answer key: a) b) c) e) f)  Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and answer these questions: a) Describe the condition of the victim. b) What first-aid instructions did the nurse tell Lan ? Answer key: a) She fell off her bike and hit her head on the road. She is conscious but she has a bad cut on her head. It's bleeding quite badly. b) Try to stop he bleeding. Use a towel or a handkerchief to cover the wound. Then put a pressure on it. Hold it tight. HOMEWORK:.  What would you do when someone has a cut on his head? / has a nose bleed?  Be ready for (SPEAK - LISTEN)  Let Ss do the exercises in workbook . .

(102) Date of preparation 2 / 1/ 2012. UNI. A FIRST-AID COURSE Period 56. Lesson 2. Speak-P.81,82. A/ Aims: Practicing in making requests, giving offers and promises. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to make and respond to requests, offers or promises appropriately ; listen and arrange the pictures . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, pictures in textbooks. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups . E/ Procedure: * Check-up Questions: - What would you do when someone has a cut on his head? - What would you do when someone has a nose bleed? A. SPEAKING I .PRE-SPEAKING. 1. Ss to look at the table on page 81 to see how to make requests, offers or promises  Requests: Can/Could/Will/Would you (get me a bandage)?  Sure = Certainly = All right = OK = Of course  I'm sorry, I can't./ I'm afraid not.  Offers: Can/Could/Shall I (get you a bandage)?  Yes, please.  No, thank you.  Promises: (I promise) I will/won't ............ or I promise to .............  I hope so. / Good. / Don't forget. 2. Eliciting the situation in each picture on page 82. a) A girl has a cut on her finger.. ® She wants to make a request (Could you ...?).

(103) ® The man wants to give an offer (Shall I ....?) b) A boy has a headache (Boy - Sister / Sister - Boy) c) A boy has bitten by a snake (Boy - Friend / Friend - Boy) d) a girl has a fever (Daughter - Mum / Mum - Daughter) e) A boy has broken the vase (Boy - Mother / Mother - Boy) ® Promise II. WHILE-SPEAKING.  Ss work in pairs to make and respond to requests, offers or promises in each situation.  T. walks round listening to the Ss speaking to each other and giving immediate help. * NB: There are a variety of answers to each picture (situation) , so T should be flexible to accept possible answers from Ss.  T. get some Ss to give their answers to the whole class III. POST-SPEAKING:. Role play. - Hand out (two sheets: sheet A and sheet B ) - Have Ss talk to each other. Sheet A * Situation 1 : Your brother seems to be ill. You want to help. Sheet B * Situation 1: You have a headache. You need some aspirine. Ask your brother for help.. * Situation 2: You have been bitten by a dog. Offer the help. * Situation 3: Your brother is complaining about your school report. You will work hark hard next term.. * Situation 2: You have been bitten by a dog. Ask your friend for help. *Situation3: Your son's school report is unsatisfactory. You are angry with him.. HOMEWORK: - Be ready for Listen / P.82 .- Learn the requests, offers and promises and their respones by heart. - Do exercises in workbook . .

(104) Date of preparation 4 / 1/ 2012. UNI. A FIRST-AID COURSE Period 57. Lesson 3. Listen-P.82. . LISTENING: I. PRE-LISTENING:. *Vocabulary: wheelchair]. a stretcher ( picture). - a wheelchair (picture) [to wheel =to push a. - crutches (pl. n) (the ditto) - an eye chart ( picture) [ eye sight ] - a parademic ( He takes care of patients but he isn't adoctor nor a nurse) Have Ss guess and match the letters A, B, C, D, E, F to the correct words in the box, then put them in the correct order. - T collects Ss' answers .. :- Ask Ss to listen and check their predictions . Ss listen and check then share with a partner . Answer key: A. ambulance B. wheelchair C. crutches D. eye chart E. scale F. stretcher Ordering the pictures  Ss listen and put the above medical equipment in the order they appear in the text (1-6)  Ss compare their answers with their partners.  T. corrects ® Answer key: F B A D E C True / False statements: - Stick the chart with the statements on the board: 1. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room. 2. The patients 's head is bandaged. 3. The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different size. 4. The baby 's mother is trying to stop the nurse from weighing her baby. 5. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it. - Ask Ss to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide which of the statements is true and which is false. - Play the tape and have Ss listen (2 or 3 times) - Ask Ss to give their answers and correct. Answer key: 1. F ( A parademic not a doctor) 2. T 3. T 4.F( stop her baby from crying) 5. F (enpty wheelchair not with a patient) III. Post listening : Write - it - up ( if there is enough time, have good students do aat home) - Ask Ss to write the story about the activities in the pictures, using the present continuous . " This is the emergency room in a large hospital……………" - Ss work in groups . - correction . II. WHILE-LISTENING.

(105) HOMEWORK: -. Be ready for Read / P.83-84 .- Learn the vocabulary by heart.. - Do exercises in workbook .  Date of preparation 6 / 1 / 2012. Period 58. Lesson 4:. UNI. A FIRST-AID COURSE READ -P.83,84. A/ Aims: Reading about first-aid instructions. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to give first-aid instructions for some cases. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , posters. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs ,groups . E/ Procedure: * Checking up : - Look at the pictures on page. 82 (speak ) and describe the actions happened . I. PRE-READING. 1. Pre teach - faint (v/adj) ® fainting [picture/ explanation] translation] - to lie ® lying (flat) [picture/drawing] [explanation/picture] - to force (somebody to do something) [translation] [picture/ mime] - to minimize [the ditto] tissue (n) [translation] - affected (adj) [translation]. - to revive. [example/ - a blanket. - to elevate  to lower -. 2.T/F Prediction : a) When a person faints, force the victim to walk round. b) When a person faints, let the victim lie with the head lower than the chest. c) When a person gets a shock, give the victim something to eat. d) We should give the victim drug or alcohol when she/ he gets a shock . e) When a person has a burn, put some cold water on the wound. - Hang the poster on the board and ask Ss to predict . - Ss work individually then share with a partner . - Correction . II. WHILE-READING :.  Ss read the instructions for first-aid on page 83 and check their predictions . - Correction . Answer key: a) F (Leave the patient lying flat.) b) T c) F (Don't give the victim any food or drink.) d)F (Don't give the victim drug or alcohol ) e)T  Ss read the instructions for first-aid and choose a correct case for each of the treatments .  Ss work in pairs .  Go around and provide the helps if necessary .  Collect Ss' answers and correct Answer key: A. Fainting: a, c, e B. Shocks: b C. Burns: d III. POST-READING :. Divide the class into 3 groups , discuss and answer the questions: Ss take turns to ask and answer these questions. - Group 1 : What should we do when someone faints? - Group 2 :What should we do when someone has a burn? - Group 3 : What shouldn't we do when a person gets shock ?  Move around and take notes Ss' mistakes then provide the helps if necessary . Ask one/ two member(s) from each group to speak out before the class ..

(106) HOMEWORK:. - Be ready for (WRITE) page 84, 85. Notes for writing: A present could be: an alarm clock, a calculator, a dictionary, a postcard,... Occasions: on my birthday, on New Year's day, on Christmas Day - Do exercises in workbook . - Write the answers in the notebooks .  Date of preparation 8 / 1 / 2012. UNI. A FIRST-AID COURSE Period 59 Lesson5. WRITE-P.84,85. A/ Aims: Writing a thank-you letter including an invitation to go on a picnic. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, posters, drawing . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Check-up Questions: - What would you do when someone faints? - What would you do when someone has a burn? Warm up : Shark attack : (revision ) ( ease ) ( lie , flat , elevate , lower , victim , …) I. PRE-WRITING:.  Pre teach vocabulary : - (to) thank Someone for something : (give an example with a gap : She thanked me …….helping her .) - (to) cheer Someone up : ( to make Someone feel happier )   T. sets the scene: Last week Nga was in hospital because she was ill. While she was in hospital Hoa sent her some flowers. After leaving the hospital, Nga wrote a thank-you letter to Hoa and invited her to come to her house on the weekend  Ss read the letter and put the verbs in the correct tense. Ss work in individually .  Monitor and help Ss with the tense forms .  Ss compare their answers with a partner .  Feedback / correction Answer key: (1) was (2) were (3) helped. (4) came (5) am (6) will phone.  T. runs through the questions to guide for writing task (page 85)  Ask Ss to answer the questions orally .  Have Ss practice speaking to each other . Ss work in pairs .  monitor and correct . II. WHILE-WRITING.  Ss write a thank-you letter to a friend including an invitation to go on a picnic.( Ask Ss to join the sentences into a paragraph ) . Ss work in groups and write their letters on the sheet of paper to hand in .  T. moves around the class and takes notes of Ss 's mistakes or provides help if necessary. III .POST-WRITING. Exhibition :.  Ask 4 groups to copy 4 chosen letters on the posters .Ss swap the letters to help each other find mistakes and do the correction.  Ask three groups to hang on their writings on the board so that the class can give comments..

(107) . Ask Ss write another letter to the another friend for other occasions . ( Ss may do at home ) .. HOMEWORK:. Do the exercise 1, 2, 3, 4 on page 86 - 88 . Be ready for language focus . Ask Ss to use the same format to write another letter to another friend for another occasion  Date of preparation 8 / 1 / 2012. U. A FIRST-AID COURSE Period 60 A/ Aims:. Lesson 6. LANGUAGE FOCUS-P.86,88. Expressing purposes with in order to / so as to. Using modal "Will" in language functions: requests, offers, promises.. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use WILL when giving requests, offers, or promises and " in order to / so as to " to indicate purposes. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard. pictures . D/ Ways of working: Individuals , pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: Exercise 1: (P. 86) Expressing purposes  Presentation :  T. explains these words and expressions: to in form / to pass the entrance exam/ anxiety  T. represents the expressions used to express purposes: in order to/ so as to + Verb + Ask the question to elicit the answer : A: Why should we cool the burn immediately ? B: We should do it so as to / in order to minimize the tissue damage. + Model then have Ss repeat in chorus , in individual . *Concept checking : Form: so as to/in order to +V-bare- infinitive . - Use: To indicate purpose . Practice :  Ss work in pairs to match 2 halves of a sentence with in order to/ so as to (follow the example).  T. asks some pairs to give their answers. ® Do the correction. Exercise 2: (P.86) Gap fill Presentation:  T. helps Ss to revise the form of the simple future tense: I / We + shall or will You/ He/ She/ They/ Mai... + will shall not = shan't; will not = won't Notice the use of : Shall I ...... ? (giving an offer) Shall we ....? (making a suggestion) Will you .....? (making a request) I promise I will………..(a promise)  Ss complete the dialogues (work individually then pair-compare their answers.)  T. corrects Practice:  Ss practice the dialogues in pairs Exercise 3: (P.87) Making request with "Will you ... , please?" Presentation:.

(108)  Ss look at the pictures and dialogues on page 87,88 and complete the dialogues with the right words. Ss work in pairs  T. corrects Answer key: b) Will you give it to me c) Will you answer the telephone e) Will you pour a glass of water d) Will you turn on the TV, please f) Will you get me a cushion  Practice:- Ask SS work in pairs . - Go around and take notes the Ss' mistakes then give the help if necessary . . - Have some pairs play the role in front of the class . Exercise 4: (P.88) Making requests, offers or promises with will or shall Presentation :  Pre-teach 2 new words (hang / the washing)  T. elicits the situations from the pictures. Picture a) The waste basket is full. Somebody should empty it. ® Will you/ Shall I empty ... Picture b) The paint on the door has peeled off . Somebody should paint it. Picture c) You/Your friend has failed the exam. You/Your friend should study harder. Picture d) The woman is carrying a heavy bag. Somebody should carry it for her. Picture e) The washing is in the washbasin. Somebody should hang it. Picture f) There is/(are) a lot of grass/(weeds) in the garden. Somebody should cut it/(them)  Practice :.

(109)  Ss work in pairs: S1 makes a request; S2 makes an offer  T. asks some Ss to say out their sentences . - Correction. HOMEWORK:.  Do all exercises in your notebooks and in the workbooks .  Be ready for: Unit 10 (Getting Started + Listen and read)/ P. 89, 90.  Date of preparation 25 / 1 / 2012. Period 61. UNIT. RECYCLING Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.89,90. A/ Aims: To practice the dialogue about how to protect the environment. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about to how to reduce the amount of garbage , protect the environment and save natural resources . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, Tape and cassette player, a mapped dialogue, chart,realia(clothes). D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I. GETTING STARTED:. Warm up : Brainstorm.  Draw the circle with an example on the board . Ask Ss to think of ways we can reduce the amount of garbage .  Deliver posters to Ss , dividing them into 4 groups .  Tell Ss to put the posters on the board after they finish and the team having the most good ideas is the winner . - Give feedback . II.. LISTEN& READ: (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1- Pre teach : - to produce (garbage)[translation] - to protect [to keep s.o/smth safe from danger] ( introduce ) to reduce [situation] vegetable matter [ example] ( introduce ) - to reuse [explanation] - fertilizer (n) [explanation] - to recycle [remind] a representative [translation] - to wrap [mime/example] ( remind) - package (n/v) : gói hàng / đóng gói ® over packaged - to throw ... away [explanation] - packaging (n) : bao bì  Checking vocabulary.: R O R 2. Setting the scene Miss Blake, a representative from Friends of the Earth is talking to the Ss of Quang Trung School .Friends of the earth show how to protect the environment and save natural resources .  Listen ® Choral repetition (some difficult sentences), open pairs(some pairs) , closed pairs. T corrects their pronunciation . 3. grammar point T elicits the sentence from Ss “ It is not difficult to remember ..” “ I am pleased that you want to know more” * Form: S+ be +adj + to-inf.../ S + be + adj + that + noun clause. T explains some difficult sentences to help Ss understand the dialogue . 4. Exercises .Answer the questions.

(110)  T. runs through the topics covered in the dialogue (a - g).  Give Ss 8 minutes to read the dialogue and answer the questions a-e. T. collects Ss 's answers and corrects . Answer key: a) Reduce means not buying products which are over packaged. b) We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, ... c) Recycle means not just throwing things away. Try to find another use for them. d) By having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth, going to the ... e) Because plastic stay very long in the environment. HOMEWORK:.  Make a list of thing we can reuse, recycle  Be ready for (SPEAK, LISTEN - p.90, 91).  Do exercises in workbook .  Date of preparation : 28 / 01 / 2012. Period 62. Lesson 2. UNI. RECYCLING Speak, Listen-P.90,91. A/ Aims: To help Ss practice in giving and responding to instructions and listening for specific information about making compost . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about things we can reuse and recycle and listen for specific information about how to make compost . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard, realia , pictures, chart, cassette . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs ,groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm-up (Brainstorming) things we can reuse or recycle glass bottles magazines (plastic bottles, newspapers, food cans, plastic bags, paper bags,...) A .SPEAKING I .PRE-SPEAKING.  Pre teach Vocabulary : -metal (n)[realia]. -. -fabric (n)[the ditto]. -. (to) belong to [translation] leather (n)[the ditto] -peels (n) ® (banana/orange/cucumber) peels - shade (n) [explanation]  T. uses realia to elicit the items and write the words in column one: plastic bottles __C__ sandals ______ pieces of material ______ cans/tins ______ newspapers ______ towels ______ glass jars ______ banana peels ______ handbags ______ cucumber peels ______ cardboard boxes ______ plastic bags ______ glass bottle ______. A Paper B Glass C Plastic D Metal E Vegetable matter F Fabric G Leather.

(111)  T. divides the class into 2 teams and asks them come to the board and put the words into the suitable groups by writing A, B, C... next each item. Example: plastic bottles __C__  T. elicits and presents the conversation exchanges: S1: Which groups do (clothes) belong to? S2: Put them in "fabric". S1: What can we do with those (clothes)? S2: We can recycle them and make them into (paper). S1: And what can we do with (banana peels)? S2: We make them into compost, and fertilize our field . (Choral repetition ® Half-Half ® T - T w c ® T w c - T ® T - S1 ® S2 - S3) II. WHILE-SPEAKING:  Ss look at the table on the board and work in pairs to substitute the words and talk about things we can recycle or reuse.  T. walks round to listen to the Ss speaking to each other and give immediate help.  T. get some pairs of Ss talk to the whole class. B. LISTENING. :. I. PRE-LISTENING:  Pre teach Vocabulary: grain (n) các loại hạt lúa thóc a compost heap: đống phân xanh sunlight (n): ánh mặt trời shade (n) bóng mát moisture (n) hơi ẩm condensation (n) sự ngưng tụ hơi nước  Open prediction  T. runs through the four questions (a-d) and the alternative answers on page 91  Ss predict the answer to each question  Ss compare their answers in pairs  T collects Ss' s answers and tells Ss they are going to listen to an expert who gives the instructions to make compost . II. WHILE-LISTENING:.  Ss listen to the tape for the first time and check their predictions .  Ss listen for the second time and confirm the answers.  T gets feedback from Ss ® T. corrects Answer key: a) A b) B c) B d) B (If most Ss do not give the correct answer to question c, ask the Ss listen again.) III. POST-LISTENING:.  If there is enough time, ask Ss to work in groups of 4 discussing how to make compost. If there is not enough time ask them to work at home to write about how to make compost. HOMEWORK:. -Be ready for (Read/ p. 92, 93);.

(112) - Note: Exercise 2 (p. 93): Completing the sentences with is/are + past participle (V-ed /V3). - Do the exercises in workbook . - Be ready for read . . Date of preparation 29/1/2012. UNIT. RECYCLING Period 63 :. Lesson 3. READ -P.92,93. A/ Aims: Reading stories about recycling in magazine. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand about things which can recycle and finish the sentences with the correct information using the passive form. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: * Checking up : - Give the introductions to make compost . * Warm up :. Brainstorming : Things are recycled . Car tires. bottles. I/.PRE-READING:. 1. Pre-teach: (a) tire[picture] (a) pipe[drawing/example] waste (n) [remind] (floor) coverings[remind] to break (broke - broken) up[remind] to prevent ... from doing sth. (a) law to throw (threw - thrown) away (a) deposit [translation] dung (n) [translation] to share [remind] to melt [example]. 2. Presentation of the passive form : - Millions of car tires are thrown away every year. - Most glass is recycled. Checking:  Meaning: bị/ được..  Form: to be + past participle (V-ed / V3)  Use: To emphasize the object or when the subject is unknown/ unimportant.  Open prediction: Discussion - Give Ss 5 minutes to work in groups of four and discuss two questions below without open the books then collect the Ss' predictions: 1) What do people do with used things? 2) What can they make from them? II. WHILE-READING:.  T. sets the scene for the reading: You're reading about recycling facts from a magazine called The Green Gazette.  Ask Ss to read 5 recycling facts on page 92 to check their predictions and answer 5 questions (a-e) on page 93. Ss work in individually . T lets Ss compare their answers with their partners . (check their answers using "Lucky numbers") - Give feedback . Answer key:.

(113) a) They cleaned and refilled them. b) The glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware. c) The Oregon government made a new law that there must be a deposit on all drink cans. The deposit is returned when people bring the cans back for recycling. d) Compost is made from household and garden waste. e) If we have a recycling story to share, we can call or fax the magazine at 5 265 456 .  Ss work in pairs to complete the sentences (Exercise 2 on page 93). T. completes the first sentence as an example. - Divide the class into 2 groups , the Ss from each team will write the completed sentences. The team which finishes first with more right sentences will win the game. NB: Ss may complete the sentences in many ways. T. accepts all possible answers providing that each sentence contains a passive form Answer key: - Car tires are (can be) recycled to make pipes and floor coverings. - Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled. - Glass is recycled. / Glass is collected and sent to the factories (for recycling). / Glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware. - Drink cans are brought back for recycling. - Household and garden waste is collected to make compost./ is made into compost. III. POST-READING:. Ask Ss to discuss about why do we can recycle the used things ?  Ss work in groups of four . HOMEWORK: - Do. -. the exercises 1,2 again .. Be ready for (WRITE) page 93, 94. Do exercises in workbook . .

(114) Date of preparation 2 / 2 / 2012. Period 64 :. UNIT 10. Lesson 4. RECYCLING WRITE -P.93,94 .. A/ Aims: Writing the instructions on how to prepare the tea leaves which are used to keep mosquitoes away. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to finish their writing. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , picture, drawing . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs ,groups. E/ Procedure: Warm up :. Hang man . ( waste paper ). I. PRE-WRITING:. Vocabulary: -to soak [ explanatio:to put something in liquid for a time so that it becomes completely wet ] - to take sth from...[ translation] to wrap [mime] - to scatter [ the ditto/ example] - a tray [picture] bucket [ drawing]. - to mash [ mime] -a (wire) mesh [translation]. - a. Exercise 1: a/ Gap fill (page 93)  Set the scene : you are going to read the text about how to recycle waste paper .  Ss read the instructions and fill in the gap with the words given. Ss work in individual, then share with a partner . - Monitor and correct . Answer key: (1) use (2) mix (3) Place (4) press (5) wrap (6) wait (7) dry II. WHILE-WRITING. Exercise 2: Writing the instructions on how to prepare the tea leaves (page 94)  Stick the photocopied pictures on the board randomly ..  Ask the Ss to work in pairs and rearrange the pictures . - Feedback .  Ss look at the picture and use the words to write. Remind Ss to add the linking words: First, Next, Then, Finally . Ss work in groups  T. moves around the class to take notes of Ss 's mistakes or provide help if necessary..

(115) III .POST-WRITING.  Ss compare their writing .  Correction. (Answer key: First take the used tea leaves from the tea pot. Next scatter the tea leaves on a tray. Then dry the leaves in the sun. Finally put the dry leaves in a pot for future use. )  Ss say the instructions of preparing the tea leaves . (If there is enough time ) HOMEWORK:. Write the instruction on how to boil vegetables.. Do exercises 1, 2, 3, 4 on p. 95 - 97 (Ss study the example for each exercise) Be ready for (LANGUAGE FOCUS)  Date of preparation 6 / 2 / 2012. UNIT. RECYCLING Period 65 : Lesson 5 LANGUAGE FOCUS-P.95-97 A/ Aims: To get Ss to further practice in the passive and in expressing their feelings using Adjectives. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to form the Passive in Future simple and the structures with Adjectives. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, Blackboard , handouts , pictures , cardboard. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure: I/Exercise 1: a/ Presentation : -Elicit the model sentences from Ss then have Ss repeat . Car tires are recycled to make pipes . -Concept checking : + Form : Passive form in the present simple . " S + is/am / are + past participle . " + Use : It is used when the subject is effected by the action of the verb (Vietnamese can be used for weaker students . ) + How to change an active sentence to a passive one : Active: S V O. Passive : S be + P.P by + O b/ Practice : Work with a partner - T explains the aim of the task: Ask Ss to read the instructions and look at the pictures on page 95. - Tell them to put the pictures in the correct reorder according to the instructions . Ss work in pairs . - Collect Ss' answers . ( a-1; b-4; c-3; d-5; e-2; f-6 ) - Rewriting : - Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences in the passive form . - Ss work individually then share with a partner . - Have some Ss go to the board and write their sentences. Answer Key: a) Picture 1: The glass is broken into small pieces. b) Picture 4: Then the glass is washed with a detergent liquid. c) Picture 3: The glass pieces are dried completely. d) Picture 5: They are mixed with certain specific chemicals. e) Picture 2: The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid..

(116) f) Picture 6: A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the liquid. Then the liquid is blown into intended shapes. II/Exercise 2 a/ Presentation : - Set the scene : Ask Ss to listen to the situation: " A famous inventor, Dr Kim, is going to build a time machine . One of his assistants , Hai , is asking him questions about the invention . He wants to know when Dr Kim will start the project . How can he say the sentence in the passive ? (use Vietnamese for weaker students ) : Use the correct form of the verb in brackets Pre teach Structures: Model sentences When will the project be started? will S be past participle b/ Practice : - Show Ss the questions (prepared on the posters .)- Ss work in individual . And ask them to fill in the gaps , using the passive . -v Tell Ss to give their answers and correct . 1/ It………..to the public when it is finished .(show) 2/ ……….it………..by the end of the year . ? (build) 3/ It…………before Tet .(finish) 4/ ………it……….by you ?(make) - tell Ss to give their answers and correct . Answer Key: 1) will be shown 2) will / be built 3) will be finished 4) will/ be made III/ Exercise 3: Complete the dialogue a/ Presentation : - Pre-teach structures: - Set the scene : Ba gives Nam a lot of directions at a time so Nam finds it's difficult to follow Ba's directions, What does he say to Nam ? Model sentences: - Elicit from Ss and read . Ss repeat in chorus . It is difficult to follow your directions . be adj. to infinitive b/ Practice : Gap fill . - Ask SS to open their books and complete the dialogues on page 96 . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogues and correct . Answer Key: 1) easy to understand 2) hard to believe 3) dangerous to go 4) important to wait IV/ Exercise 4 : Complete the letter a/ Presentation : Pre teach Structures: Model sentences - Set the scene : Nam passed the English exam and his grandparents are delighted at it . What did they write to him ? We are delighted that you passed the English exam. S be adj. that + noun clause . b/ Practice : * Matching : - Ask SS to read the letter on page 97 and match the words . - Have the SS go to the board and draw the lines . 1. Relieved (adj) a. xin chúc mừng 2. congratulations b. trông chờ 3. look forward to (v) c. Xác nhận lại 4. confirm (v) d. nhẹ nhõm - Get Ss to copy the vocabulary . * Gap fill : - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box - Get some Ss to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct . Answer key 1) was happy 3) is afraid 2) am relieved 4) Are/ sure.

(117) 5) am certain HOMEWORK:. - Be ready for 15- minute test. -Do exercises in workbook . Rewrite the letter beginning with :" Nam 's grandparents are delighted that he………………." - Be ready for U11 - Getting started and listen and read . . Date of preparation 6 / 2 / 2012. UNIT. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Period 66. Lesson 1. Getting Started , Listen & Read-P.98-100.. A/ Aims: Reading for details about how to express interest. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use some expressions to express their interest. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, Tape and cassette player , posters. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups. E/ Language content: - Grammar : Polite request : Would you mind + V-ing ? / Would you mind if I …..? - Vocabulary: crop, sugar-cane, a forty-minute drive, ………….. E/ Procedure: I/GETTING STARTED: - Stick the pictures on the board . Ask Ss to open their books, read and match the names with the pictures. (pair work) Answer Key: a) Ngo Mon Gate b) Nha Trang Harbor c) The Temple Literature d) Ha Long Bay II/ LISTEN & READ:. 1. Pre- teach - a crop ( translation ) - a sugar cane ( picture/ explanation) - water buffalo/ buffaloes (translation/ picture) - a 40- minute drive= the drive takes 40 minutes (explanation/ translation)  Checking vocabulary : R O R 2. Set the scene: It’s the first time the Johns have visited Viet Nam. Hoa meets Tim at the airport then they travel to Ha Noi in a taxi. Along the road Tim can see a lot of things such as cows, water buffalo, and sugar cane. 3. Practicing the dialogue: - Ss listen to the tape (or to the teaching ) reading the dialogue ® choral repetition, open pairs (some pairs ) , closed pairs . T corrects their pronunciation . 4. Grammar point: - T explains the difficult sentences , some sentences have new structures . this helps Ss understand the dialogue To express a request: - Would you mind sitting in the front sea?.

(118) - Do you mind opening the window? - Would you mind if I took a photo? - Do you mind if I take a photo? * Use: To make formal requests. * Form: a) Would you mind / do you mind + V-ing...? b) Would you mind if I + V2...? Do you mind if I + V (simple present)...? 5. Exercises a. True/ False statements: - T runs through the T/ F statements. - Ss read the dialogue silently and give the answers. Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary. Answer key: a- T; b- T; c- F: in a taxi; d- T; e- T; f- F: not only rice and corn but also sugar cane b. Answer the questions : ( if there is enough time ) - Get the SS to read the dialogue again and answer some questions . - Run through the questions . 1/ Where does Hoa meet the Jones ? ( at the airport ) 2/ Is the first time they have visited Vietnam ? ( Yes, it is .) 3/ How do they travel to Hanoi ? (by taxi ) 4/ What would Tim like to do ? (He'd like to take a photo ) - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer in 5 minutes . - Some pairs answer and write on the board . - Correction . *Complete the story. Hoa meets the Jones at the....... .They travel to.. By……….... Tim and shannon are happy. On the way to Ha Noi, they see paddies, ………………. and. , the rice. . Tim would like to take a photo.. HOMEWORK:. Practice the dialogue. Do exercises in workbook . Write polite requests in your notebooks . Be ready for: SPEAK(UNIT 11) .

(119) Date of preparation 10 / 2 / 2012. Period 67 :. Lesson 2. UNIT. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Speak -P.100,101 .. A/ Aims: To help Ss practice in making suggestions and using “mind” to make requests. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make suggestions and requests with “mind” and recognize the place directions . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, posters,. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm-up : Find out in the previous lesson the suggestions and requests and the reply. Example: - Can I help you with you bags, Mrs. Jones?- Thank you. - Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? - No problem. I prefer the front seat. A. SPEAKING: I. PRE-SPEAKING:. 1. Pre teach structures: Remind Ss of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr. Johns and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the sentences from Ss. Model sentences: a) A: Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? B: No problem. b) A: Would you mind if I took a photo? B: Not at tall. Concept checking: * Use: To make and respond to formal requests. *Form: a) Would you mind / do you mind + V-ing...? b) Would you mind if I + V2...? / Do you mind if I + V (simple present)...? Responses: * Agreement: No, I don’t mind/ No, of course not. / not at all/ Please do/ Please go ahead. * Disagreement: I’m sorry I can’t/ I’m sorry. It’s impossible I prefer you didn’t / I‘d rather you didn’t. * Meaning: Xin cảm phiền Set the scene: you are a tourist on vacation in Ho Chi Minh City. You want to visit a market. This is a conversation between you and the tourist officer. Elicit and model . Ss repeat in chorus .. You: Excuse me? Tourist Officer: Yes? You: I’d like to visit a market. Would you mind suggesting one? T.O: Not at all. How about going to Thai Binh Market? It opens from about 5 a. m to 8 p .m You: That sounds interesting. Thank you..

(120) T.O:. : You're welcome.. II. WHILE-SPEAKING :. * Open pairs: Ask 2 pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. * Closed pairs: Have Ss open their books and use the information (on page 101) to practice other dialogues. Ss in pairs should be assigned to work on different information each . Eg: Group 1 : Markets . Group 2: Museums Group 3 : restaurants - T monitors and corrects. - Some pairs play the role of the dialogues . III. POST-SPEAKING: Role play - Divide the class into 2 groups: a group is a tourist, another one is a tourist guide. - Ss practice in two groups using their own words. - Listen and give the help if necessary. IV. HOMEWORK: Write down 2 complete dialogues using your own words. - Do Ex in workbook. - Be ready for (Listen) .

(121) Date of preparation 10 / 2 / 2012. Period 68 : Lesson 3. UNIT. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM Listen- P.102 .. A/ Aims: To listen for details about place directions.. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make suggestions and requests with “mind” and recognize the place directions . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, a map, tape , posters, cassette . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups. E/ Procedure:  Checking-up the old lesson : S1 is a tourist and S2 is a tourist officer . - Ask them play the role of the dialogue. B. LISTENING:. Set the scene: The Johns family is going around Hanoi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the maps. Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the map. I. PRE-LISTENING:. 1. Pre teach: - Let me check the map - It’s in the opposite the direction from the pagoda. - I’m starving! - to walk over the bridge and take the first road on the left. - just past the pagoda on the same road 2. Open Prediction: - Ss look at the map and predict the answers.. - Ss compare their answers in pairs. - T collects Ss’ answers. - Ss listen to the tape for the first time and check their predictions. II. WHILE-LISTENING. - Ss listen to the tape for the second time (or the third) and confirm the answers. Then share the answers with a partner . - T gets feed back from Ss and corrects if necessary. Answer Key: a) – restaurant; b) – hotel; c) – bus station; d) – pagoda; e) – temple III. POST -LISTENING:. - Ss listen again and answer the questions: 1. Why does Tim go back the hotel? 2. Where is the hotel ? 3. Where is the restaurant? 4. Is the restaurant in the opposite direction from the pagoda? 5. How is Mrs Jones going to get to the pagoda? - Ss recall the tape transcript and talk to their partners about the places the Johns visited..

(122) HOMEWORK:. Rewrite the places that the Johns visited. Do Ex in workbook. Be ready for (READ) . Date of preparation: 12 / 2 / 2012. U.

(123) Period 69 :. Lesson 4. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM READ - P.102,103 .. A/ Aims: Reading for details about the tourist advertisement. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read an advertisement and know some places of interest in Viet Nam. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures of beautiful spots , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs , groups . E/ Procedure:  Warm-up : Chatting: What is this place? Da Lat :a) It is called the city of Eternal Spring .b) It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes. c) You can find the most kinds of flowers here. Nha Trang :a) It’s a seaside resort ,b) It has a very big monument of Buddha. c) It has an Oceanic Institute. Sa Pa :a) It is a mountainous resort. b) It has tribal villagers .c) Sometimes it has snow. Ha Long Bay :a) It is recognized as a World Heritage site by UNESCO. b) It has a lot of caves. c) It consists of a lot of islands. I. PRE-READING:. 1. Pre teach: - accommodation (n) [U] place to live - slope (n) [drawing] - tribe (n) - tribal (adj.)[translation] - giant (adj.) =very big - a jungle:[very thick forest] - limestone (n) [translation] - magnificent (adj.) : - a florist: [a person who sells flowers] - mountain climbing (n) - (to) sunbathe: [to lie in the sun to get some sunlight.] 2. Prediction : Matching: Put the poster on the board and ask Ss to predict and match the words or phrases in column A to those in column B.- - Ss have to work individually in 3 minutes . - Ask the Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect the words . - T collects the Ss' answers . A B 1. Nha Trang a) tribal villagers, mountain- climbing. 2. Da Lat b) The place where President Ho Chi Minh left Viet Nam in 1911. 3. Sa Pa c) Swimming and sunbathing. 4. Ha Long Bay d) Oceanic Institute 5. Nha Rong Harbor e) flower gardens II. WHILE-READING:. - Ss open their books, read the text and check the boxes.- Ask Ss to go to the board and draw the lines to connect the words. Answer Key: 1d; 2e; 3a, 4c, 5b - Ask Ss to read the advertisements about the resorts and check the topics mentioned in the grid (page 104) - Get Ss to work in groups of four to complete their answers using the imindmap. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary..

(124) - Have the Ss read the advertisements again in 7 minutes and do the exercises 2 . - Ss work in individually then share with the partner . - Monitor and correct . III. POST-READING: Role play - Tell Ss to ask and answer questions using the information in the text. A: Where should [Andrew] go? A: Why? B: He should go to [Sa Pa]. B: Because [he studies tribes and he likes mountainclimbing]. - Ss work in pairs; T monitors and corrects. HOMEWORK: -Read the text again in detail. - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for: WRITE/ P. 106. . Date of preparation 14/2/2012. Period 70 : Lesson 5. UNIT. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM WRITE - P.105,107 ..

(125) A/ Aims: To write a narrative using a guided composition. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to write a narrative. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, board , gap fill charts . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pairs . E/ Procedure:  Warm-up: Which word? (Get Ss to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill) - Put the missing words in a box on the board and have Ss study first. (Use Vietnamese) - Ss have to work in group of four or five in 3 minutes . written climax attention brief events A narrative is a sequence of (1).................These events are usually (2)................in chronological order and often lead to a (3).................The first sentences of a narrative should get the readers’ (4)...................and the ending should be (5) ...................... Answer Key: 1) events 2) written 3) climax 4) attention 5) brief I. PRE-WRITING :. 1. Pre teach: - a canoe /u/ - (to) paddle/ a paddle: anything used to paddle - (to) overturn - (to) rescue: to save anybody’s life from danger - an adventure - (to) hire: rent 2. Set the scene: Last week while on vacation in Da Lat. The Johns family had quite an unforgettable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake. What did they do? And what happened to them?. 3. Ordering statements: Ask Ss to open their books, read the first part of the story and rearrange the sentences to complete the story. - Ss work in pairs in 5 minutes . Get some pairs to give their answers . - T gets feedback and corrects. Answer Key: c – a – g – d – f – b – e . -Have some Ss read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors . 4. Ordering pictures : - Have the Ss look at the pictures on page 106 and 107 and guess the meaning of the new words .. - Write the vocabulary on the board and ask Ss to match them . - Matching 1. to stumble vang lên 2. to go off nhận ra 3. to realize trượt chân - Ask Ss to look at the pictures again and rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story. Ss work in individually then share with a partner - T gets feedback from the Ss and corrects. Answer Key: d – b - e - h - a - f – c - g.

(126) II. WHILE-WRITING:. Write-it-up - Ask Ss to use the rearranged pictures and the given words to write a story about Uyen in 10 minutes . Ss work in pairs ( or groups of four ) then individual - T monitors and helps Ss with words or structures. Note: Use the simple past tense to write a narrative. Answer Key: Uyen had a day to remember last week. She had a math exam on Friday, but she got up late. She realized that her alarm clock did not go off. As she was leaving home, it started to rain heavily. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. Suddenly she stumbled against a rock and fell on to the road. Her schoolbag went into a pool of water and everything got wet. Strangely, the rain stopped as she got to her classroom. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her exam. III. POST-WRITING :. Exhibition: Have 2 Ss write their stories on the board and the T helps the Ss correct. HOMEWORK: Write the whole story in your notebooks. Do Ex in workbook. Be ready for: L Focus/ P.108-110. . Date of preparation 14 / 2 / 2012. Period 71 : Lesson 6. U. TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAM LANGUAGE FOCUS - P.108, 109 .. A/ Aims: To help Ss practice in using –ed and –ing participles, making and responding to requests, using “mind”..

(127) B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to do EX referring to the lesson.. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks , posters , pictures . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, groups , pairs . E/ Procedure:  Warm-up: Memory game: (if there is enough time ) - Ask Ss to open their books and observe the pictures on P. 109 carefully. - Divide the class into 2 teams to go to the board and write from the memory the names of things they’ve just seen in the pictures. Answer Key: box, lamp, truck, doll, flowers, elephant, bear, and rabbit Language Focus 1: Presentation : Set the scene: It’s time for recess and the Ss at Quang Trung school are in the school- yard What are they doing?. - T asks questions and Ss answer them. Teacher: What’s Mr. Quang doing? Ss: He’s walking/ going up the stairs. T: (Miss Lan) Ss: (carrying a bag/ talking to Nam) - T elicits the target language from the Ss by asking the question below then has Ss repeat. T: Who is the man walking up the stairs? Ss repeat in chorus , individually (some pairs ) + Model sentences: The man walking up the stairs is Mr. Quang. Present participle phrase Concept checking: *Form: V-ing ® present participle *Use: used as an adjective to modify a noun with active meaning. Practice: Word cue Drill a) Mr. Quang/ walking up the stairs b) Miss Lien/ carrying the bags c) Nam/ talking to Miss Lan d) Lan/ Standing by the table e) Nga and Hoa/ playing chess T models cue 1. Ss repeat in chorus , in individual then do the rest in pairs . Language focus 2:Presentation : - T. elicits the target language by asking the question: “How much is the old lamp made in China? Model sentence: The old lamp made in China is five dollars. made in China: a past participle phrase modified “The old lamp” Concept checking: *Form: Regular verb + -ed Past Irregular verb: V3 *Use: used as an adjective to modify a noun with passive meaning..

(128)  Practice: Question- Answer Drill 1. T: How much is the box painted green? Ss: The box painted green is one dollar. ( in chorus , in pairs ) 2. Truck made from recycled cans/ $2 3. Doll dressed in red/ $3 4. Flowers wrapped in blue paper/ $1 5. Toys kept in a card board box/ $10 Ss work in pairs asking and answering. T tells some pairs to demonstrate for the class . Language Focus 3 : Presentation : - Elicit the model sentences learned from Ss .. + To make formal requests using " mind " and respond . Would you mind / Do you mind + V-ing ……….? Responses : Agreement / Disagreement  Practice Cardboard drill : -Prepare 4 cardboards with cues including check (√) and crosses (x) - Model the first cue 2 or 3 times . Ss repeat in chorus , T ↔ Whole class , half ↔half , T ↔S1 , S1 ↔S2 .. - Go on with the same steps for the second cue ( if necessary ) - Ask Ss to work through the rest of the cues : new cue- new student . Ss work in pairs . ( if there is enough time ) a) move/ car ü c) get/ coffee Î Would you mind moving your car? Would you mind getting me some coffee? No, of course not. I’m sorry. I’m too busy right now. b) put out/ cigarette ü d) wait/ a moment Î Would you mind putting out your cigarette? Would you mind waiting a moment? No, of course not. I’m sorry. I can’t. I’m already late for work Language focus 4 :  Presentation: - Elicit the model learned from Ss. Ask Ss to look at the pictures 1-6 on page 110 and order them.. 1. turn off the stereo 2. watch TV while eating 3. sit down 4. postpone the meeting 5. turn on the air conditioner 6. smoke Answer Key: 1d 2f 3a 4c 5e 6b  Practice : Role play - Model the first cue and have Ss repeat Ex : 3 . S1 : Would you mind if I sat down ? ( Do you mind if I sit down ? ) S2 : Please do .  Production:.

(129) Get Ss to work in pairs, playing the roles to demonstrate the exchange based on the models below the pictures. Write down all the exchanges of the pictures in L F (a=f) HOMEWORK: - Do Ex 3 in workbook. - Learn all the grammar notes by heart . - Be ready for Revision (Unit 9-11) . Date of preparation: 18 /2 / 2012 Period 72 REVISION A. Aims: - To revise vocabulary and grammar points which Ss have learnt in U9-11 . - To introduce the exercises in test 3 . - To remind all skills : Listening , Reading , and Writing . B. Objective : Ss can remember all vocabulary and grammar points , and know how to do the exercises in the test 3 . C. Teaching aids : Posters , textbook.

(130) D. Ways of working : Individual , pairs , groups . E. Procedure : I. Languages focus : 1. Vocabulary and Grammar. a/ Grammar : - How to do a first- aid course -Talk about feelings - Express interest - in order to/ so as to : - Ask Ss to remind the use , form and meaning So as to / in order to + V-bare- infinitive : để - T hangs on the poster on the board , models the first cue then has Ss work in groups of four , write on the posters . - Ss combine each pair of the sentences , using " In order to / so as to " 1/ He went to Ho Chi Minh City . He wanted to meet his farther . → He went to Ho Chi Minh City in order to / so as to meet his farther . 2/ My mother went to the market . She wanted to buy food . 3/ They are spending a lot of money . They are trying to please their friends . 4/ ^The kids have kept silent for days . They want to tell their parents that they are not pleased . - Ask the group finished first (2 groups ) to hang the posters on the board and correct . - Correction . -modal Will to make requests, offers and promises : - Have Ss remind the structures of requests, offers and promises and the responding . -Passive forms – Present Simple / Future Simple/ past simple ) : - Ask Ss to remind the passive form of the verbs in present , past , and future tense and how to change the sentences from active into the passive voice : + Present simple : is / am /are + P. P + Future simple : will / can + be + P. P + Past simple : was / were + P. P * How to change into the passive voice : Active: S V O. Passive : S be + P. P by + O - Have Ss change these sentences into passive voice . - Ss work individually then some Ss go to the board and write . - Correction . - Adjectives followed by – an infinitive / - a noun clause : - It + be + adj + to - infinitive / To - infinitive + be + adj . - S + be + adj + to- infinitive . - S + be + adj + that + S + V + … - Have Ss work in pairs , combine each pair of the sentences , using the adj + to- infinitive / noun clause structures . 1. They passed all the exams . They were lucky . 2. She can't come . I'm afraid . 3. You won't come back . I'm worried . 4. Susan received a lot of birthday present . She was happy . - Correction . - -ed and –ing participles : - Have Ss remind the use of the present and participle phrases . - Hang the poster on the board and ask Ss to use the right form of the verbs in the box to fill in the gaps . - Get Ss to work individually then share with a partner . - Give feedback . Sit break live water sing 1. The girl ………….at 50 Tran Hung Dao is my friend . 2. The garden …………….every morning is full of flowers . 3. The cat ……………. On the table is hers . 4. The vase ……………yesterday is my father 's favorite one ..

(131) -  Requests with – Would/ Do you mind if...? - Would/ Do you mind + V-ing? b/ Vocabulary : -Words concerning first aid : ambulance , bandage , bad burn ……………… - Words about healthy environment : recycle , garbage , wrap ………………… - Sequence markers : first , then , next , finally . II. Skills : 1. Listening : - Ask Ss to revise the listen they learnt in unit 9, 10 , 11 . - Listen to the teacher’s reading and fill in the blanks 2. Writing : Write a thank-you note Write a narrative Write the sentence as directed in brackets Give and respond to instructions 3. Reading : Read the text and do the exercises III . Model test : ( if there is enough time and the teacher can ask Ss to do them at home . ) I/ Choose the best answer 1. I promise I _________ my homework before going to class. a) is do b) will do c) have done 2. Drink cans _ ________ back for recycling. a) is brought b) brought c) are brought 3. The weather today is hot. Could you _______the air conditioner? a) turn off b) turn on c) turn of 4. It’s difficult _________ your directions a) follow b) to follow c) followed 5. Would you mind ________ _in the front seat of the taxi? a) to sit b) sitting c) sits II/ Write the sentence as directed in brackets 1. your writing/ difficult/ read ( Write the sentence, using “adj + to infinitive”) 2. They are lucky. They passed all the exams ( combine, using “adj + to infinitive) 3. I wish I have enough money. I want to buy a new house ( Combine, using “so as to”) 4. They wash the glass with a detergent liquid ( Change into passive form) III/ Reading : Every day of the year throughout the world , about twenty million paper bags and newspapers are screwed and thrown away . Making paper requires a lot of wood pulp and the work of millions of workers . Many countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labor . In countries where there is the cooperation of the public, take away the ink, crush it up and make it into pulp again . For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can be saved . We can insist that the more paper people save , the more trees are preserved . ( pulp (n) bột gi ấy, bột nhão sợi gỗ (để làm giấy) ; labor (n) lao động ) 1/ Answer the questions : (2 ms) a. How many paper bags and newspapers are thrown away every day ? b. What have many countries done to save money and labor in making paper ? c. What do they need when they make paper ? d. How many trees can be saved for every ton of recycled newsprint ? 2/ Answer true (T) or false(F) (1.5 ms) a. If we save more paper, many trees can be cut down ………….. b. There is the cooperation of the public in making paper . ……….. IV/ Writing : Use the given words to make complete sentences (2.5 ms) 1. old car tires / recycle / make / shoes / sandals . ………………………………………. 2. Do / mind / turn / television ? ………………………………………………………. 3. Old lamp / make / China / 5 dollars . ………………………………………………….. 4. It / not difficult / keep / school yard / clean . …………………………………………..

(132) 5. I / pleased / you / know / how / protect / environment ………………………………………………………….. IV/ Listen: Listen and fill in the gaps : ( 1.5 ms) This is the (1) emergency room in a large hospital . A paramedic is wheeling a (2)..............on a stretcher into the emergency room where a doctor is waiting to treat the patient . The patient doesn't look well . His head is (3)........... and his eyes are closed . A nurse is pushing an empty (4)...........towards the exit . She is probably taking it to a patient in the ambulance . HOMEWORK: Revision Unit 9-11. Be ready for ONE PERIOD TEST. . PERIOD 73:. ONE PERIOD TEST 3. A. Aims : Ss do the exercises in the test . B. Teaching aid : script . C. Procedure : NHẬN BIẾT TN I/Listening II/ Reading III/Language focus 6 1.5 IV/ Writing TỔNG 9 Name :................................ Class:……………………. 3. THÔNG HIỂU. TL 1.5. TN 2 6. 1.0 1.5. VẬN DỤNG. TL 6. TN. TL. 1.5 5. 3. 14. 3.5. ONE PERIOD TEST 3 SUBJECT: ENGLISH 8 I. Nghe rồi trả lời các câu hỏi sau : (1,5m). 5. TỔNG. 2.5 2.5. 3 8 12 5 28. 1.5 3 3 2.5 10.

(133) 1. Is Shannon thirsty ? 2. Is the restaurant in Ho Tay Road ? 3.What is opposite the tourist information center ? II. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất ( A , B , hoặc C )để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau: (3ms) 1. I can see a boy …………. a water buffalo. A. ride B.riding C.to ride 2. The old car tires are ………… to make pipes and floor coverings. A. reused B. reduced C. recycled 3. Would you mind if I …………. a photo ? A.take B.took C.taking 4. Which underlined part of the words has different sound ? A. sight B. flight C. village 5. I am happy ………….. all the exams. A. passed B. pass C. to pass 6. People usually use compost to ………….. their fields. A. fertilize B. melt C. reduce 7. I am ……………… to join in the trip around the Capital . A. excited B. exciting C. excitedly 8. These toys were …………. of wood . A. make B. made C. making 9. People throw …………….. billions of cans every year . A. away B. out C. into 10. Could I help you ………………. your luggage ? A. with B. of C. on 11. The man ……………. next to me is my father's friend. A. is sitting B. sitting C. sat 12. I watched a film …………….. by Walt Disney last night . A. produced B. produce C. producing III. Chọn từ thích hợp trong khung để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau : (1,5ms) living, healthier , trip , walk , holidays , go ,. countryside ,. spending. All (1)…………….. are wonderful for children and of course for me, too. I like spending my holidays in the (2)…………... It is lucky my grandparents are(3) …………. in a small village, not very far from my city. So, I usually(4)…………. there by bicycle. Taking a leisurely bicycle (5)…………… to the countryside is the best way of recreation. I have a good time staying with my grandparents during my holidays. I always feel (6) ………….. when I come back to my city for my school work. *Trả lời câu hỏi sau: (1,5m) 1. What do school children think of their holidays? - ……………………………… 2. Where does the writer like spending his holidays ? - ……………………………… 3.How does the writer feel after his holidays in the countryside? - ……………………… IV. Viết câu theo gợi ý trong ngoặc : (2,5ms) 1. Nam passed all the exams . He was happy . (kết hợp cặp câu sử dụng "adj + to-inf" ) - ………………………………………………………….. 2. People wash the empty milk bottles with water. (đổi sang bị động) - …………………………………………………………………… 3. Shall I carry your luggage ? (bắt đầu bằng từ cho sẳn) - Do you mind …………………………………………. 4. It / necessary / cool / burn / immediately . (Viết câu hoàn chỉnh sử dụng từ gợi ý) - ………………………………………………………….. 5.The bike / make / China / fifty dollars . (Viết câu hoàn chỉnh sử dụng từ gợi ý) - …………………………………………………………... . KEYS: I. Nghe rồi trả lời các câu hỏi sau : (1,5m) 1. No, she isn’t. 2. Yes, it is 3. The bus station is opposite the tourist information center. II. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất ( A , B , hoặc C )để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau: (3ms) 1.B 2.C 3. B 4. C 5. C 6.A 7.A 8.B 9. A 10.A 11.B 12. A III. Chọn từ thích hợp trong khung để hoàn thành đoạn văn sau : (1,5ms).

(134) (1) holidays (2) countryside (3) living (4) go *Trả lời câu hỏi sau: (1,5m) 1. They think their holidays are wonderful. 2. He likes spending his holiday in the countryside. 3. He feels healthier. IV. Viết câu theo gợi ý trong ngoặc : (2,5ms) 1. Nam was happy to pass all the exams. 2. The empty milk bottles are washed with water. 3. Do you mind if I carry your luggage? 4. It’s necessary to cool the burn immediately . 5. The bike made in China is fifteen dollars.. Date of preparation 2 / 3 / 2012. Period 74 : Lesson 1. (5) trip. (6) healthier. U. A VACATION ABROAD Getting Started , Listen & Read -P.111,113 .. A/ Aims: To help Ss read for details about making plans for a vacation abroad and practice matching the names of the countries with pictures and flags . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be aware of how to make, accept and decline invitation. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures , cassette , dics , chart . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, groups , pairs . E/ Language content : - Vocabulary : relating to make invitation . - Grammar : - making / accepting / declining an invitation . - making a complaint . E/ Procedure: I. GETTING STARTED :. 1) Guessing games.

(135) Showing the pictures to Ss one by one and ask them to guess what country it is.. a The USA. b Australia. c Thailand. d Britain. e Canada. f Japan. 2) Chatting: T gives the instruction - T demonstrates with a student . T: Where do you want to visit among these countries? Or Which country do you want to visit? Ss: ..I'd like to visit Australia . . T: Why? Ss: Because Australian people are friendly . - Ss practice in pairs . II .LISTEN & READ : T introdices the topic of the dia using the pictures.. 1. Pre teach : - (to) include [translation] - (to) come over [remind] - abroad (adv.) [in a foreign country] - (to) be/ go/ travel/ live abroad 2. Set the scene : Mrs. Quyen is going to the USA for a vacation. She is ringing her friend, Mrs. Smith to tell her about the trip. - Ask Ss open their books and listen to the dics® choral repetition (some difficult sentences ). - Ss listen and repeat in chorus , open pairs ( some pairs ) then closed pairs . T corrects their pronunciation . 3. Grammar point : T elicits the model sentences from Ss and explains . 1. Making an invitation: “Would you like to come and stay with us?” 2. Accepting an invitation: “Yes, I’d love to but we’ll only be in town for 3 days.” 3. Declining an invitation: “That’s very kind of you but we’re coming on a tour.” 4. Making a complaint: “Oh dear. He’s always working.” 4. Exercises : A . T runs through the grid and the questions. - T gives Ss 8 min to read the dialogue silently and give the answer in individual . Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary.. Answer key: DATE SCHEDULE. Monday 25 Tuesday 26 Wednesday 27 Thursday 28 Coming to San Coming out Having dinner Leaving San Francisco with the Smiths Francisco B . Comprehension questions: Ss look at their books and answer the questions on page 113 then compare with their partners. Give feed back and correct . * Answer Key: a) No, they won’t. Because they are coming on a tour, and their accommodation is include in the ticket price, so they will stay at the hotel. b) No, he won’t. Because he will have a business meeting in the evening that day. c) Mrs. Smith will pick her up at the hotel. HOMEWORK: Do Ex 1,5/ P 70,73 in workbook. Be ready for: SPEAK P 113-114 Learn the new words , and read the dialogue again ..

(136) . Date of preparation 4 / 3 / 2012. U. A VACATION ABROAD Period 75. Lesson 2. Speak-P.113-114. A/ Aims: To practice in making plans using brochures and flight information. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their plans for a trip abroad C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, posters , D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work, group work E/ Procedure:  Check -up: 1. Where will Mrs Quyen and her husband go for a vacation? 2. Where will they stay there? 3. How long will they stay? 4. Will her husband have dinner with the Smiths ? Why (not)? A. SPEAK : I. PRE-SPEAKING :. Pre teach: - an itinerary:[ a plan for a journey including the route and the places you visit ] - a flight: [a journey made by plane ] - via (prep.) [through a place ] - facilities (plural) [translation] - a brochure ( regalia ) - Ss read the table carefully . - T asks Ss to answer the questions for information . (How many flights a week can you take from Los Angles to Boston ? / Which flight can you take everyday of a week ? ……………).

(137) II. WHILE-SPEAKING :. - Set the scene : These people are making a plan for their trip from Los Angles to Boston . Let's do it with them . - Put the dialogue chart on the board then elicit the exchanges from Ss . -Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange . - After finishing the dialogue, ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue . - Closed pairs : Ask Ss to work in pairs , replacing the information using the tables. - Monitor and correct . S1: Which flight are you going to take? S2: ................................. S1: What time does it leave Los Angeles? S2: At.......(hour).......on....(date).......... S1: What time does the flight arrive in Boston? S2: At........(hour)............ S1: Where are you going to stay? S2: At the.....................Hotel. (It’s expensive but it has more facilities./ It’s cheaper...) S1: Which places are you going to visit? S2: ........................................................... S1: When are you coming back? S2: ........................................................... (If there is enough time ) Ss can do it at home . Ask Ss to make a plan for their coming summer holiday by filling the information in their itinerary. Example: Departure (Hue): ................................................. Arrive (CHIC): .......................................................... Accommodation: ................................................. Sightseeing: ................................................................ Depart (CHIC):..................................................... III. POST-SPEAKING. HOMEWORK:. Write your itinerary in the notebook. Do Ex in workbook, page 75. Be ready for Listen / P. 115. . Date of preparation: 5 / 3 / 2012. U. A VACATION ABROAD Period 76. Lesson 3. Listen –P.115. A/ Aims: To listen for information about the weather forecast . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get information about the weather forecast in big cities in the world..

(138) C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, dics , cassette , posters , D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work, group work E/ Procedure:  Check up : Have two Ss talk about a plan for their coming summer holiday B. LISTEN : I. PRE-LISTENING :. cool. a/ Brainstorm :. cold cloudy. windy humid dry fine rainy wet snowy warm. sunny. b/ Open prediction :. - Set the scene : " you are going to listen to the weather forecast about the cities in the table and now you have to guess first . - Hang on the table on page 115 on the board . -Ss predict in pairs . T collects Ss' prediction . Ss listen once . II. WHILE-LISTENING :. Gap fill: Put the gap fill table on the board. Have Ss copy in their notebooks. City. Weather. Temperature Low High 26 15. 1. Sydney 2. Tokyo 3. London cold 4. Bangkok warm; 5. New York 15 6. Paris 10 - Tell Ss they are going to listen to the weather forecast about the cities in the table and have to fill in the gaps with the information they hear. - T plays the tape 2 or 3 times. Ss listen and do the task then compare the answers with their partners..

(139) - T gets feedback and gives the correct answers.. Answer Key: Temperature Low High 1. Sydney dry; windy 20 26 2. Tokyo dry; windy 15 22 3. London humid; cold 3 7 4. Bangkok warm; dry 24 32 5. New York windy; cloudy 8 15 6. Paris cool; dry 10 16 III. POST-LISTENING: Role play ( If there is enough time ) Model: asking a good student Write the exchanges on the board A: What’s the weather like in Sydney today? B: It will be dry and sunny. A: How about the temperature? B: The low will be 20 and the high 26 degrees. - Open pairs: Ask a pair to demonstrate the exchanges. - Closed pairs: - Have the whole class practice speaking, using the information in the table. - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges before the class. City. Weather. HOMEWORK:. Writing-it-up: Use the information in the table to write a weather forecast: Here is today’s weather forecast for the international travelers. “In Sydney, it will be...................................................” - Be ready for READ/ P 116-118. Date of preparation : 5 / 3 / 2012. . CORRECTION OF TEST 3 A/ Aims: -To help Ss identify the typical and common mistakes in their paper tests . - To help Ss remind of the grammar points relating to the test . B/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, and the whole class C/ Materials : posters , tape , cassette . D/ Procedure: I/ Running through the test :  Hand out Ss 's papers (after they have been marked)  Ask Ss to answer the questions : a/ How many parts are there in the test ? b/ What are they ? ( What must we do in part I, II,..) II/ Revising the grammar points and vocabulary relating to the test : - T elicits the target languages from Ss .  Present and participle phrases .  " in order to" and " so as to "  Adjectives followed by an infinitive and a noun clause .  The simple future tense with "will " in making and responding to offers , promises , and requests.  Passive form : - The passive form of the verbs in present , past and future tense ; and how to change the sentences from active into the passive voice ..

(140) III/ Talking about the results of their tests : - Not many Ss understand , remember the structures, words and do the test well. - None gets 10 marks . - Most of the weak Ss can't rewrite the sentences using the structures learnt . - many Ss can answer the Qs in reading and choose the correct words . - Some Ss have many mistakes about spelling . Some copy friends' work . IV/ Correction :  Ask them to find out their mistake and self-correct them first (if necessary).  Have the whole class correct the test . I/. Listening : - T sticks the poster with the wrong sentences on the board and let Ss listen to the tape again and the whole class correct. - Correction . * Keys : 1. No, she isn’t. 2. Yes, it is 3. The bus station is opposite the tourist information center. II/ Language focus : A/ Choose the correct word : - Ask Ss who have the wrong answers to read aloud and the whole class correct . - Get Ss to explain and say why they must choose that word . - Correction . * Keys : II. Chọn đáp án đúng nhất ( A , B , hoặc C )để hoàn thành mỗi câu sau: (3ms) 1.B 2.C 3. B 4. C 5. C 6.A 7.A 8.B 9. A 10.A 11.B 12. A III/ Reading : - T sticks the poster with wrong sentences on the board then runs through and explains the difficult phrases and sentences in the text . - Have the whole class correct . Keys: (1) holidays (2) countryside (3) living (4) go (5) trip (6) healthier *Trả lời câu hỏi sau: (1,5m) 1. They think their holidays are wonderful. 2. He likes spending his holiday in the countryside. 3. He feels healthier. IV/ Writing : Use the words given to make complete sentences : - Ask 5 Ss have the wrong sentences go to the board and write . - Get the whole class correct . Keys: Viết câu theo gợi ý trong ngoặc : (2,5ms) 1. Nam was happy to pass all the exams. 2. The empty milk bottles are washed with water. 3. Do you mind if I carry your luggage? 4. It’s necessary to cool the burn immediately . 5. The bike made in China is fifteen dollars. HOMEWORK: - T congratulates the Ss who have good and excellent tests and flays Ss who get bad marks , then encourages them to study harder . - To ask them to correct the tests by themselves again .. - Be ready for (READ)(Unit 12) .

(141) Date of preparation: 6 / 3 / 2012. Period 78 Lesson 3. UN. A VACATION ABROAD READ - P.116,118. A/ Aims: Reading for information about the places of interest in the world. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to obtain some knowledge about some scenic spots in the USA. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, tape. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work E/ Procedure: Chicago  Warm-up: places of interest in the USA San Francisco I. PRE-READING :. 1/ Pre teach vocabulary : - (a) volcano [picture/ drawing] - lava (n) [ the ditto] - (to) pour out [the ditto] - (to) carve [ mime/ explanation] - (to) be situated [ translation] - overhead (adv.) = above your head 2/ Set the scene: Mrs. Quyen and her husband visited many places of interest in the USA while they were there. Read the postcards she sent to her children to see what she did and saw at each place. You predict what places did she visit ? 3/ Open prediction :. - Ask the Ss to look at the pictures and predict the places Mrs Quyen visited . - Ss work individually . - Collect Ss' prediction . II. WHILE-READING :. 1/ Checking prediction : - Ss read the postcards and check their prediction ..

(142) - Feedback / correction . 2/ Grid: - Hang on the grid on the board . - Ask Ss to copy the grid in their notebooks . -Ask Ss to read the postcards and fill in the gaps with the information taken from them. - Ss do individually then share with their partners .. (Answer Key) Places What she did and saw a) Hawaii - went swimming, visited Kilauea Volcano b) New York (went shopping, bought lots of souvenirs) c) Chicago (saw Lake Michigan) d) Mount Rushmore (saw the heads of 4 American presidents) e) San Francisco (visited Fisherman’s wharf, the Napa Valley, Alcatraz prison) - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write. - T gives feedback and corrects. 3/ Reading comprehension questions: - T runs through the questions a- e/ P. 118 - Ss read the postcards again, answer the questions in pairs then compare with their partners. - Call on some pairs to give their answers and give feedback. Answer Key: a) (She went there) by plane. b) She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz. c) It is the mount where the heads of 4 American presidents are carved into the rocks. d) It is also called: “The Windy City” e) She went shopping. III .POST-READING :. - Have Ss work in five groups, each group writes one place.. HOMEWORK. - Write the answer into your notebooks. Do Ex 6 on P 74/ workbook. - Be ready for: WRITE.

(143) Date of preparation: 8 / 3 / 2012. Period 79 : Lesson 5. U. A VACATION ABROAD WRITE- P.118. A/ Aims: Practice writing a postcard. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a postcard to their friends about their trip. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, drawing. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm-up: Lucky numbers . T asks some questions about Mrs. Quyen and her husband’s trip in the USA. 1) Where did Mrs. Quyen and her husband spent their holiday? ( In USA) 2) Who did they visit when they were in San Francisco? (The Smiths) 3) Lucky number 4) What did Mrs. Quyen do while her husband was visiting The Statue of Liberty? ( She went shopping ) 5) Lucky number 6) What did they see on Mount Rushmore? ( They saw the heads of four American presidents are carved into the rock . I. PRE-WRITING :. 1. Gap Fill: Set the scene: From the USA Mrs. Quyen sent postcards to her friend Sally to tell her about the trip. - Hang on Mrs Quyen 's postcard in exercise 1 . - Ss run through the postcard and complete the gaps then comparing . - Ask Ss to look at the postcard on page 118 and complete the gaps. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the word they guess. - T gets the whole class to correct . Feedback . *Answer Key: 1) in 2) people 3) weather 4) visited 5) her 6) nice/ lovely7) bought 8) for 9) heaviness 10) soon 2. Grid : - Write the topic on the board and hang on the poster of the grids :  Information needed to write a postcard : - Ask Ss to look at part 2 ( p.118) - Go through the instructions by using questions : a/ What do you write about the place ? ( Name of places ).

(144) b/ What do you write about the weather ? ( The weather is warm or cold … ) - Let Ss copy the grid . - Ask Ss to read the postcard (write 1 ) again and fill in the gaps with the sentences showing the information on the left . - Have some Ss go to the board and write their answers in the grid . - Give the feedback and correct . * Information for a postcard Place:................................................................................. How to feel about the people: ............................................ Weather: ............................................................................. Who you meet/ visit: ..................................................... What you see: ..................................................................... What you buy: .................................................................... II. WHILE-WRITING :. 1. Set the scene: Imagine you are a tourist on a vacation in a certain place/ city in Viet Nam. Write a postcard to a friend about your trip. 2. Filling in the grids : - Give instructions , ask Some good Ss some questions to get information and fill in . Ss do in pairs to complete 3. Writing: - T makes sure all the Ss know to write a postcard . Ss write the postcard individually in 10 minutes . - T monitors . Dear Nga, I’m having a wonderful time in Da Lat. The people are hospitable and the weather has been cool since I arrived. In Da Lat I visited my relatives and friends. It’s nice to see them. I went on a sightseeing tour to Cam Ly, Prenn Waterfalls, visited Xuan Huong Lake and many other beautiful places. I bought a lot of souvenirs for you. See you soon, Love Hoa III. POST-WRITING : Exhibition : - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their postcard then ask them to read their postcards - The whole class correct . - T gives feedback and corrects. - Let Ss work in pairs , ask and answer about their cards . 1. Where did you visit ? 2. How did you feel about the people there ? 3. What was the weather like ? 4. Who did you meet there ? 5. What did you see ? 6. What did you buy ? HOMEWORK :. Write your postcards in your notebook. Do Ex 7 in workbook, page 75. Be ready for Language focus . .

(145) Date of preparation 10 / 3 / 2012. UN. A VACATION ABROAD Period 80 : Lesson 6 LANGUAGE FOCUS - P.119,120 A/ Aims: Practice in past progressive and present progressive tenses with “always” B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about activities, using the present and past progressive tenses. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. Cardboards. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , groups. E/ Procedure:  Warm-up: Matching : - Hang following phrases and the six pictures( on page 119- language focus 1 ) on the board . - Ss work in groups of five or six and do the matching . - Correction . Column A .. Column B 1/ read a comic . 2/ write a letter 3/ eat dinner. 4/ take a shower 5/ talk to a grandma 6/ walk with her dog.

(146) I/ Language focus 1: 1. Presentation : - Set the scene : " Look at the picture a " " what was Ba doing at 8 o'clock last night ? " Model sentence: + S1 : What was Ba doing at 8 o’clock last night? + S2 : He was taking a shower at 8 o’clock last night. - They were talking to each other at that time. -Concept checking: Past progressive Form: S + was/ were + V-ing Use: to indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past. 2. Practice: Word cue drill - Model the first sentence and have Ss repeat . - Ask the Ss to work in individual then share with a partner . - Have some Ss go to the board and write the sentences . 1. Ba / take a shower 2. Hoa / have dinner 3. Ba / read a comic 4. Nga/ write a letter 5. Na/ walk with a dog 6. Lan and her grandma/ talk to each other II/ Language focus 2: 1. Presentation : a. Ordering the phrases in column B : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures on P119 and order the phrases in column B on P 120.. - Ss work in pairs . - Get some Ss to give their answers . - Correction . * Answer key: a) C b) F c) E d) B e) D f) A b. Teaching grammar : - Elicit the model sentences by asking the questions : a) What was the Le family doing when the milkman came? b) What happened while Nga was eating? Model sentence: The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came. past progressive simple past The phone rang while Nga was eating. Concept checking: * Form: Main clause conjunction adverbial clause Past continuous when past simple Past simple while past continuous *Use: Sequence of tenses: An action was taking place in the past when another action took place. 2. Practice: Picture cue drill - Put the photocopied pictures on the board in the order of the word cues . - Model the first sentence and have Ss repeat in chorus , individual..

(147) - Ask Ss to work through the rest of the cues individually , then share with a partner - Get feedback and correction . a) The Le family/ sleep b) Hoa / eating c) Nam/ win the race d) Mrs. Thoa cook e) Lan / arrive at school f) it/ rain III/ Language focus 3: 1. Presentation : - Elicit the model sentences from Ss , (using Vietnamese ) - Have Ss repeat and write the sentence on the board . * Model sentence: Ba is always forgetting his homework. Concept checking: “always + present progressive” Use : expresses a complaint. Form : S + is / am / are + always + V-ing . 2. Practice: Picture drill - Ask Ss to look at the pictures. T models the first one and has Ss to repeat( choral - individual repetition ).. - Ask a good St to do the second cue .- New cue- new student . Call on some Ss to the board to write the sentences. - Correction . HOMEWORK : Write complete sentences in the notebook (Ex 1, 2, 3) . Do exercises in workbook . Be ready for U.13 - Getting started + listen and read . .

(148) Date of preparation :12 / 3 / 2012. U. FESTIVALS Period 81 : Lesson 1 - Getting Started , Listen & Read -P.121,122 . A/ Aims: Reading for details about traditional festivals. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for explanations of events. C / Language content : - Vocabulary : the words relating to traditional festival . - Grammar points : compound adjectives . D/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, dics, cassette , pictures . E/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . F/ Procedure: I. GETTING STARTED Chatting - Write the names on the board : Tom , David , Huckleberry , Oliver , Robinson. - T sets the scene : " These people are going to go on their visit to Viet Nam and they need advice on where to go ." -Ss run through the statements on page 121 . - T asks the Ss to help these people to decide where to go . - T demonstrates with a student . T: Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. Where should he go? Why? S1 : He should go to Ha Long Bay / Bai Rang beach / Bac My An Beach …. - Ss work in pairs . 2. David is interested in ancient towns. ® 3. Huckleberry likes mountain- climbing. ® 4. Oliver is keen on pottery.® 5. Robinson is fond of crowded places.® II. LISTEN & READ (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1 Pre teach - (to) fetch: to go to get and bring it back - (to) yell: to shout loudly - (to) urge: to make a person/ an animal move more quickly - (to) rub: (mime) - (to) participate in = (to) take part in/ participation (n) - (to) award (SO) (something) / to award something to SO.  Checking vocabulary. : R .O . R 2. Set the scene: Ba invites his friend Liz to a traditional festival in the north of Viet Nam. Do you know what kind of festival it is? (a rice cooking festival). - How many competitions do people enter in a rice- cooking festival? (3).

(149) - In water- fetching competition. What do people do? How about a fire- making/ a rice- cooking competition? - Ss listen to the tape ® choral repetition.  practice the dialogue in open pair ® closed pair. 3. Grammar point: Compound adjective -Elicit examples from Ss and write on the board a rice- cooking festival a water- fetching competition a fire- making competition (article) (noun) + (V-ing) (noun) Compound adjective * Concept checking: Use: to form a compound adjective Form: noun - V-ing Drill: - an industry that makes cars ® a car- making industry - a contest in which Ss arrange flowers ® a flower arranging contest 4. Exercises : a. Have Ss read the dialogue silently once and explain the difficult phrases or sentences to help the Ss understand the dialogue . b. T/F statements: - T runs through the T/ F statements. - T gives Ss 8 min to read the dialogue silently and give the answers. Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary. *Answer key: a) F →only one team member takes part in the water- fetching contest. b) F→ one person has to collect one water bottle. c) T d) F→ pieces of bamboo are used to make a fire. e) F→ the judge tastes the rice f) T - Ask the Ss to answer the questions . ( if there is enough time ) - Have the SS work in groups and draw the imindmap on the posters . ( one group write a contest ) - Ask one person in each group to retell about the contest they write. - correction . Two team members.. Rub pieces of bamboo together. .. Water-fetching. 1 km. bamboo. Make a fire.. One person from each team takes part in it. Run to the river and take a bottle of water. Return to the starting position.. rub (v). Pieces of bamboo. bamboo (n). Fire-making. Six people take part in it. First, separate the rice from the husk. Then cook the rice. HOMEWORK:. -Practice speaking the dialogue. – Answer the questions:.

(150) a/ How many competitions do people enter the rice cooking festival ? b/ In the water fetching competition , what do people do ? c/ How About a fire- making contest ? d/ What about a rice cooking competition ? - Do exercise 5 on page 80 . - Be ready for: SPEAK . . Date of preparation: 16 / 3 / 2012. Period 82. Lesson 2. U. Speak- P .123.. FESTIVALS. A/ Aims: Practice in talking about preparations for Tet . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their preparations for special event. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work, group work E/ Procedure: Check-up: Ss called answer some questions : 1/ What do you call the festival where people have to cook rice ? (Rice cooking festival ) 2/ How many competitions are there in the rice cooking festival ? What are they ? ( 3/ water- fetching , fire-making , and rice-cooking ) 3/ What do people use to fetch water ? (bottles) 4/ Do they use pieces of wood to make fire ? ( No, pieces of bamboo ) 5/ What do people have to do before they cook rice ? ( separate the rice from the hush ) I. PRE-SPEAKING 1 . Pre teach - pomegranate (n) - peach blossoms [ picture/ explanation] - marigolds (n) - dried water melon seeds [realia] - spring roll [translation] 2. Ordering - Set the scene :" Mrs Quyen is talking to Lan about their preparations for Tet " . - Run through the statements in bubbles on page 123 . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue on page 123 and put the sentences in the correct order. - Call on some pairs to give their answers. - T gives feedback and corrects. Answer key: A – F C–H D–J B–G E–I - Open pair- Closed pairs - T monitors and corrects. II. WHILE-SPEAKING : Mapped dialogue : - T shows the following poster on the board .. Mrs. Nga Hoa A. you/ tidied/ your room? 1. Yes/ where/ you/ going B. market/I/ have to/school things/ for you 2. could/ collect/ me/ new uniform clothes/ tailor/ corner C. Sure/ will 3. thanks/ anything/ want/ me/ do/ while/ you / out? D. Not really/But /want/ your room/ 4. Mom/ I/ know/ what/ do/ now/I/ will/ clean/ the bookshelf look nice/ festival 5. Bye E. That/ very good/ Bye - Run through word cues . - T gets some pairs to practice each exchange and calls one good pairs to demonstrate the whole dialogue . - Open pairs , closed pairs . III. POST-SPEAKING : - Have Ss list preparations for Tet using the imindmap ..

(151) - Ss work in groups - Ss give their feedback - T shows the prepared imindmap. HOMEWORK:. Practice speaking. Do Ex in workbooks. Be ready for Listen . .

(152) Date of preparation: 18 / 3 / 2012. U. FESTIVALS Period 83. Lesson 3. LISTEN- P .124.. A/ Aims: Practice in listening for details about how to make preparations for Tet . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to what The Robinson family are making the preparations for Tet (special event.) . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, tape , pictures , posters , cassette . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work E/ Procedure: Check-up: Ss called answer some questions : -What does your family do to prepare for Tet ? - What do you often do ? I. PRE-LISTENING: 1 . Pre teach - peach blossoms [ picture/ explanation] - marigolds [translation] - dried water melon seeds [realia] - spring roll [translation] 2. Gap fills prediction :. * Set the scene: The Robinson family is making preparations for Tet. They want to buy things to make it a national festival as Vietnamese people do. - Ask Ss to read the statements on page 124 and guess the words in the gaps. - Write Ss’ predictions on the board. II. WHILE-LISTENING : - T plays the tape twice; Ss listen and check their answers. - T plays the tape again and corrects. Answer key: a) Mr. Robinson/ flower market b) traditional c) dried water melon seeds d) make 3.Grid: Ss copy the grid on P 124 in their notebooks , listen and fill in the gaps with the information taken from the statements above. - Ss listen and work in groups of five or six . - Call on some good Ss to give their answers. Answer key:. Things to do Mr. Robinson Go to the flower market to buy peach blossoms and a bunch of flowers. Liz Go to the market to buy candies and a packet of dried water melon seeds. Mrs. Robinson Go to Mrs. Nga’s to learn how to make spring rolls. III. POST-LISTENING: - Have good Ss ask and answer following questions: a. What does Mrs Robinson want Mr Robinson to do for her? b. Does Liz go to the market to buy a dress for her? c. Whose house does Mrs Robinson go to learn how to make spring rolls? - Collect Ss’ answers and correct . HOMEWORK: Practice speaking. Do Ex in workbooks. Be ready for READ ..

(153) . Date of preparation: 20 / 3 / 2012. U. FESTIVALS. Period 84 Lesson 4. READ -P.124,126 .. A/ Aims: Reading for details about Christmas. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some knowledge about Christmas. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, tape (song), pictures , posters. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . E/ Procedure: Warm up: Singing a song - Teach Ss an English Christmas Song ( Silent night , I wish you a merry Christmas ) - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and sing along . I. PRE-READING 1/ Pre teach : - (to) spread (spread- spread): to cover a larger and larger area. - Christmas carol (Ex: Silent night is a Christmas carol) - patron saint: thánh bảo hộ - jolly (adj.): happy and cheerful. - (to) decorate: to make something more attractive by putting things on it. - Santa Claus = Father Christmas 2/ Prediction: - T says " Christmas is an important festival in many countries around the world . You predict what special things relating to Christmas day . " - Ss have to look at the pictures and work in individual .. II.. WHILE-READING - Ask the Ss to read the paragraphs on page 124, 125 to check the prediction . 1/ Grid : - T draws a grid on the board; Ss copy it into their notebooks. - Ss read the paragraph and complete the grid in individual then sharing . - Call on some Ss to fill in the gaps in the grid on the board. - T gives feedback and corrects. Answer key: Christmas specials The Christmas tree The Christmas cards Christmas carols Santa Claus. Place of origin Riga England (No information) USA. Date Early 1500s Mid- 19th century 800 years ago 1823. 2/ Comprehension questions (a-e/ P. 136) - T runs through the questions (a-e/ P. 126) and explains the difficult phrases or sentences in the text . - Ask Ss to read the paragraph again and answer the questions (individually ® pair compare) - Call on some Ss to give their answers. - T gets feedback and corrects. Answer key:.

(154) a) More than two centuries ago. b) He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends. c) 800 years ago. d) An American professor named Clement Clark Moore. e) On the description of Saint Nicholas in professor Moore’s poem. III. POST-READING: Complete the sentences : ( SS may do the exercises at home ) 1/ Christmas tree, Christmas card , Christmas carols and Santa claus are …………………….. 2/ The jolly man with a red suit who gives children presents is ………………….. 3/ Christmas is one of the …………………in many countries around the world . 4/ When you want to send your friends Christmas greetings you should use ………………………….. - T hangs on the poster on the board and have Ss complete in group of four . - Collect Ss' answers and correct . HOMEWORK. - Write- it- up: Use the information in the grid to write a brief paragraph. - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for: WRITE .. .

(155) Date of preparation: 22 / 3 / 2012. Period 85. U. FESTIVALS Lesson 5 WRITE - P.126,127 .. A/ Aims: Practice writing a report. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a report on the festival they have joined . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . E/ Procedure: Can you tell me the Festivals in Viet Nam? Warm up:. FESTIVALS in VIETNAM. I. PRE-WRITING: - set the scene:.  Gap fills: - Ask Ss to use the information on P 126 to fill in the gaps in report on P. 127. - SS work in pairs and write the answers on the pieces of paper . - Collect Ss' papers and correct . * Answer key: 1. rice cooking 2. one/ a 3. water fetching 4. run 5. water 6. traditional 7. bamboo 8. six 9. separate 10. added - Help Ss understand the report by asking some questions. II. WHILE-WRITING : - Set the sence and ask Ss to write a similar report on a festival they’ve joined recently. - T makes sure Ss to talk about “Youth Organization Camping Festival “ - Ss look at the questions (a-g/ P. 127) and answer the questions first..

(156) - Collect Ss’ answers and write the cues on the board. - Have Ss work in pairs, write the answers and connect the sentences to make it a report. - T monitors and helps weaker Ss. a) Youth Organization Camping Festival b) On the school yard c) One day d) 2/3 competitions ( picture- drawing, rice-cooking, flower- arranging, folk song-singing…) e+f) - picrure-drawing contest: each person from each class/ draw / picture/ his (her) mother. - rice-cooking contest: two class members/ seprate/ rice/ husk/ then / cook rice - flower- arranging contest: one class member/ arrange / the flowers/ attractively - folk song-singing contest: one class member/ sing/ folk song/ beautifully g) Wonderful/ thrilling and exciting …. - Have S1 write (a-d), S2 (e-f), S3( g) on the posters . - The whole class correct . - T gives feedback and corrects. III. POST-WRITING: Retelling - Call on some good Ss to go to the board and retell their report written . - Correction. HOMEWORK : - Write your own report on another festival. - Do exercises 8,9 -P.82,83. - Be ready for: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1, 2, 3, 4.. . Date of preparation: 22 / 3 / 2012. U. FESTIVALS.

(157) Period 86 : Lesson 6 LANGUAGE FOCUS - P.128,130 A/ Aims: Further practice in using the passive. Compound adjective. Reported speech.. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past, present and future tenses and compound adjectives . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks , pictures , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , individual work . E/ Procedure: Warm up: Pelmanism * Infinitive: - put - break - write - scatter - hold - pull - make jumble *Past-participle : put broken written scattered held pulled made jumbled I / Pre-teach vocabulary : - Dried mushrooms (n) [ realia] - (to) jumble [picture] - a bull [picture] - (to) fight [ explanation/ picture] - a plumber [ the ditto] - a faucet [ realia ] II/ Language 1: 1. Presentation: - Matching 1) Christmas songs a) award 2) a tree b) hold 3) a fire c) write 4) An English speaking contest d) perform 5) The first prize e) decorate 6) The Christmas carol f) make g) put - Ss work in pairs , then share with others . 1-d; 2- c; 3- f; 4- b; 5- a; 6- c; 7 - T reminds Ss the passive form in present , past , and future . - T collects Ss' answers and writes on the board . 2. Practice: Gap fill - Ss run through the sentences . - Have the Ss fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in the box . - Ss work in pairs . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write their answers (only verb form ) - For each sentence , Ss should be asked why they decided to use that verb form . a) were performed b) was decorated/ put c) will be held d) is made e) was awarded f) was written II/ Language 2: 1. Presentation : - Ss recall the passive form in the present perfect tense . S + have / has + been + P.P . 2. Practice : Gap fills: - T sets the scene : " Hanh and her mother have just got home from the market . when they enter the kitchen everything has just jumbled .". - Ss use the right form of the verbs in the box to complete the dialogue then sharing . - Feedback . - Correction . - Ss play the role of the dialogue ..

(158) 1) jumbled 2) broken 3) broken 4) scattered III/ Language 3: Compound Adjectives 1. presentation : - T elicits with the help of the picture . + What do you call the contest ? ( A rice -cooking contest ) + What do you call this group of words . ? ( compound noun ) + What is this form ? ( N - V-ing + N ) * Form : Noun - V-ing . - Ex: a. a rice - cooking festival b. a water - fetching contest 2. Practice - Ss do the exercise 3 in the textbooks in individual . - Feedback / Correction . a) It’s a fire- cooking contest b) It’s a bull- fighting festival c) The US has a big car- making industry d) It’s a flower- arranging contest e) VN is a rice- exporting country. f) It’s a clothes- washing machine. IV/ Language 4: Practice reported speech 1. Presentation :. 5) pulled. Set the scene: Yesterday, Lan’s grandmother, Mrs. Thu, needed a plumber. A man came to her door and said, “I’m a plumber.” (direct speech) - Ask Ss to report what the man said and write it on the board. * Model sentences: Reported speech He said he was a plumber. (reported/ indirected speech) - Ask Ss to pay attention to the changes in: a. Tenses: Quoted Speech Reported Speech - simple present - past simple - will - would - must - had to - can - could - may - might b. Pronouns :( Depending on the subject of the main clause) I ® He/ She We ® they c. Adverbs of place and time: - this – that - tomorrow – the next day - now – then - yesterday – the day before - here – there - ago – before - today – that day - next week – the following week 2. Practice: - Ss do the exercises in pairs . - Feedback / Correction . b) He said he could fix the faucets. c) --------- the pipes were broken. d) ............ new pipes were expensive. e)............. Mrs. Thu had to pay him then. HOMEWORK :Do the Ex again. Do Ex 1, 4 / P. 79 in workbook. Be ready for unit 14 : getting started, listen and read .  Date of preparation :24 / 3 / 2012. UNIT.

(159) WONDERS OF THE WORLD Period 87 : Lesson 1. Getting started, Listen& Read-P.131,132. A/ Aims: To practice in reading to seek information. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to seek information about a language game to complete a summary C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, cards, tape , posters , cassette . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work, group work . E/ Language content : - Vocabulary : - a clue , guessing game . - Grammar : Question words before to- infinitives. F/ Procedure:  Check-up: Ss called turn the following sentences into reported speech: a) “ You can’t park here” A police officer told me. b) “ I’m happy now.” a girl said to her mother I. GETTING STARTED: Quiz Have Ss look at the pictures on page 131 and do the matching.. - Check if they know where/ in which country these wonders are. a) The Pyramid (in Egypt). b) Sydney Opera House (Australia) c) Stonehenge (a prehistoric ritual (hành lễ tôn giáo) monument situated in Salisbury Plain in SouthWestern England and dating from late Stone Age and Bronze Age.(see teacher’s reference book Tiếng Anh 8/ P. 141-2) II. LISTEN AND READ : ( make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre teach: - (to) be bored [ drawing ] - a guessing game [ translation] - a clue /klu:/ a piece of information helps you to discover the answering of a question. * Checking vocabulary : R . O . R 2. Set the scene: Nga, Nhi and Hoa are playing a game: a language game called guessing game. Listen to the conversation and find out the game , the rules of the game . -Ask the Ss to listen to the tape twice ® choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs . - T corrects their pronunciation . 3. Grammar point : Model sentences: I don’t know how to play it S V question word to- infinitive * Concept checking: Form: S + V + Question word + to- infinitive Use: Reduced form of an indirect question e.g.: I don’t know how I can play it. to play it. Please tell me where I can go during the visit. to go 4. Exercises : a. Complete the summary : - T runs through the incomplete summary. - T gives Ss 8 min to read the dialogue silently and give the answers. Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers..

(160) - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary. Answer key: (1) game (2) place (3) clue (4) Viet Nam (5) America (6) Golden (7) right (8) was b. Put the statements in the right order : ( If there isn't enough time , Ss can do it at home ) . * How to play the guessing game : 1. B ask questions to find out who or what is . 2. A thinks of the famous person or place . 3. B wins if she / he can guess the correct answer . 4. A gives B a clue . 5. B loses if she / he cannot guess the correct answer . 6. A can only answer "yes" or " no " . - Call on some pairs to go to the board and write their answers . - Get the whole class to correct . HOMEWORK :. -. Practice the dialogue. Do Ex 6/ P 87 in workbooks. Be ready for Lesson 2. SPEAK+ LISTEN/ P 132- 133 .. . Date of preparation: 26 / 3 / 2012. U. WONDERS OF THE WORLD Period 88 : Lesson 2. Speak, Listen -P.132,133. A/ Aims: To help Ss practice in asking and answering questions about places and how to reported them ..

(161) - To get Ss to practice in recognizing and correcting mistakes. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to recognize mistakes through listening to an advertisement and make a report on famous places using reported speech . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, cards, tape , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work, group work E/ Procedure: Warm up : Matching : - Hang on the poster on the board . - Ask the Ss to read the statements and the names of the famous places in the box on page 133 and do the matching . 1. It was designed and built by the French Civil engineer with 300 meters in height ( Eiffel Tower ) . 2. It is in south central ASIA , 8.848 meters high above sea level ( Mount Everest) 3. It was built from 246-209 BC and some people say it can be seen from the moon .( Great Wall of China ) 4. It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the House of Parliament in London . (Big Ben ) 5. It is a skyscraper in Manhattan , New York City .( Empire state building USA ) 6. It is a famous place in Quang Binh Province recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESCO . ( Phong Nha Cave ) 7. It is a famous place in Quang Ninh Province . ( Ha Long Bay ) 8. It is a chain of Coral reefs in the coral sea , off the North eastern coast of Australia .(Great Barrier Reef .) 9. It is a central Viet Nam .( Hue Citadel ) 10 . They are located in Kuala Lumpur ( Malaysia ) . ( PETRONAS Twin Towers ) A . SPEAK I. PRE-SPEAKING :. Questions and answer drill - Explain the requirement of the task. - Ask the Ss to make Yes / No questions about ten places in the box , using the information in the matching . - Ss work in group 10 / 14 ( each student in a group asks the question . ) - T demonstrates with two students . Example: Is Phong Nha cave in Southern Viet Nam? (No) Is PETRONAS Twin Towers the tallest building in the world? (Yes) Is the Great Barrier Reef a world Heritage site? (Yes)- Suggest: - Monitor and assist Ss if necessary . - Have Ss ask and answer the questions / check Yes or No . - Call on a group to demonstrate their work . .( Ss work in pairs) 1. Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris? (1889) 2. Is the Empire State Building located in New York City? 3. Are the PETRONAS Twin Towers located in Malaysia? 4. Is the Great Barrier Reef in Australia? (Yes) 5. Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore? 6. Is Mount Everest in Nepal? 7. Have you ever visited Hue citadel? 8. Is the Big Ben in London? II. WHILE-SPEAKING : Set the scene: Ask a student: T: Is Hue Citadel in the central Viet Nam? S: Yes, it is. Ask Ss to listen: T: I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in the Central Viet Nam. She said it was. - T writes the statement on the board. Model sentences: I said to Lan, “Is the Hue citadel in the Central Viet Nam?” (Yes- No question ® directed speech) I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in the Central Viet Nam..

(162) (main clause). whether. (indirect Yes- No question). Concept checking: Indirect Yes- no question Form: S V (O) if/ whether S V ... Note: (to) say ® (to) ask / want to know.... If the verb in the main clause is in the past tense, the tense in the indirect question must be changed. Direct question Present simple Simple future Present progressive. Indirect question Past simple Future in the past Past progressive. III. POST-SPEAKING :. Choose a group’s answer to demonstrate the model (asking and reporting) Example: Teacher: Is Great Wall of China in China, Nga? Nga: Yes, it is. ® I asked Nga if Great Wall of China was in China. She said it was. B. LISTEN : I . PRE-LISTENING : a/ Pre teach: - heritage (n) - relaxing (adj.): a relaxing vacation - crystal clear (a) = completely clear and bright - coral (n) - jungle (n):a very thick forest - (to) snorkel - marine ( adj ) b/ Pre- questions :. - What's this ? ? ( It's an advertisement . ) - What does it say about ? ( a quiet : relaxing vacation ) - What famous place does it mention ? ( Great Barrier Reef Marine Park ) . - T asks and the whole class answer . II . WHILE-LISTENING : Set the scene: You are going to listen to an advertisement on the tape. There 4 mistakes in the advertisement in your book . What are they? - Have Ss read the advertisement for a few minutes. - Ask Ss some questions about the geographic names in the paragraph. - Play the tape twice; Ss listen and give their answers. - Ss listen to the tape one more time and check their answers. - T gets feedback and corrects. Answer key: (1) far north (2) hotel (3) rainforest (4) 6924 HOMEWORK : Do Ex 1 in workbooks/ P 84. Be ready for: READ. Learn new words by heart ..  Date of preparation: 28 / 3 / 2012. UNIT 14. WONDERS OF THE WORLD Period 89 Lesson 3. READ - P.134. A/ Aims: To read for details about the wonders of the world..

(163) B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures , posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Procedure:  Warm up: I. PRE- READING : 1 .Pre teach : - (to) compile [ translation ] - (to) claim: (to) say something is true. - (to) honor : to show respect - god (goddess/ female) - religion (n) – religious (adj.) - royal (adj.): Phu Xuan (Hue) used to be an old royal city of Vietnam. – royalty (n) 2. True/ False Prediction: Put the chart on the board 1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of what he thought were the seven wonders of the world. 2. The only surviving wonder is the Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt. 3. Today we can still see the Hanging Gardens of Babylon in present- day Iraq. 4. Angkor Wat was originally built to honor of Hindu God. - Run through the statements and gets the Ss to do individually . - Collect Ss' answers . II. WHILE-READING : - Ss read the passage and check if they have right predictions. - Have some Ss correct the false answers . Answer key: 1. F: A Greek man named Antipater did. 2. T 3. F: The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt. 4. T * Ss read the passage again and choose the beat answers to complete the sentences. - Ss run through the sentences and work in pairs . - Stick the answers chart on the board . - Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show the missing words . - Ask the Ss to choose A, B , C or D . - Correct and have the Ss write the right answers in their notebooks . Answer key: a) C b) A c) D d) B III. POST-READING : Answer the questions : 1/ Which wonders did the ancient Greeks know about ? 2/ What is the largest temple in the world ? 3/ Was the Great Wall of China first in the list can you still see today ? 4/ Which wonder on Antipater 's list can you still see today ? - T hangs on the poster on the board and ask the Ss to read the text again and answer the questions in the group of four / eight . - Have the groups which have finished first stick the posters on the board . - Correction . HOMEWORK : - Grid:- T draws the grid on the board and asks Ss to read the passage again and fill the grid with the. information taken from the text. Wonders of the world 1. The Hanging Gardens of Babylon 2. The Pyramid 3. ...................................................... 4. ...................................................... 5. ....................................................... Country Iraq Egypt ................... ................... ....................

(164) 6. ....................................................... .................... - Learn the lesson well. Be ready for. Write/ P. 135. Do Ex 5/ P 87 workbooks.. . Date of preparation: 30 / 3 / 2012. UNIT. WONDERS OF THE WORLD Period 90 : Lesson 4. WRITE - P.135. A/ Aims: To practice in writing a letter to a friend. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend telling him/ her about their recent trip. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . E/ Procedure: Warm up: Who is the faster ? - Draw the grid on the board and have the Ss work in group of ten within 2 minutes complete the grid ..

(165) - Deliver posters to the Ss . Wonders of the world 1. The Hanging Gardens of Babylon 2 . ………………………………….. 3. ...................................................... 4. ...................................................... 5 . ...................................................... 6. ...................................................... 7 …………………………………….. Country Iraq …………… ................... ................... ................... ................... ……………. - Ask the Ss to put the posters on the board if they finish first . - Give feedback and correct . - The group who has the most right answers is the winner . I. PRE-WRITING : 1. Pre teach: - (a) ranger [ a person who takes care of park .] - edge (n) [ drawing / realia] - temperate (adj.) [ translation/ explanation] - a canyon [ translation/ picture] - break taking (adj.) very exciting, impressive - Stone Age/ Bronze Age (n) 2. Insertion : Ask Ss to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his trip to the Grand Canyon on P. 135. - Tell Ss to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the missing sentences (A, B, C or D). - Ss do in individual then sharing with a partner . - Call on some Ss to read their completed letters in front of the class. - T gives feedback and corrects. Answer key: 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A II. WHILE-WRITING : Set the scene: Imagine you have visited a place recently. Write a letter to a friend of yours and tell him/ her about this place. - T draws the outline on the board and elicits some details . a) What have you just visited? b) How far is it from your house? / How did you get there ? c) What is it like?/ Is it beautiful? d) How about the weather? e) How did you feel? - Have the Ss work in pairs and talk about something they have done first by asking the questions above . - Ask the Ss to write the letters in their notebooks in individual . - Monitor and assist Ss if necessary . III. POST-WRITING : Exhibition - Call on some Ss to write their letters on the board while others read their letters in front of the class. - T gives feedback and corrects. HOMEWORK : Write your postcards in your notebooks. Do Ex 7 in workbook, page 89. Be ready for LANGUAGE FOCUS .. .

(166) Date of preparation: 2 / 4 / 2012. UNI. WONDERS OF THE WORLD Period 91. Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS-P.136,137. A/ Aims: To further practice in reported speech , the passive , the question words before to- infinitive , and verbs + to- infinitive . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to report what people ask and answer , use the verbs + to- infinitive , and question words before to- infinitive . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Procedure: I/ Language Focus 1: 1. Presentation : - (to) construct: xây dựng - summit: (đỉnh núi) - expedition (n) đoàn thám hiểm - a guide: hướng dẫn viên * Revision: - Ask Ss to say the passive in the simple past: Was/ were + past participle . - Ss run through the e xercises and the words given in the box . 2. Practice : - Have Ss look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in the box for the gaps in the sentences. - Ss complete the sentences with the right passive form of the verbs. - Ss work in pairs within 3 minutes. - Call some Ss to give their answers. - T gets feedback and corrects. * Answer key: a) was completed b) was constructed c) was designed d) was presented e) was reached II/ Language Focus 2: 1. Presentation: - Set the scene: Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one of the world cultural Heritages of Vietnam.( Be side answering some oh Nhi 's questions , Nga gave her some additional information about My Son . ) Report the questions Nhi asked Nga. Use the reported speech. - Have some Ss retell the use of the indirect Yes / No questions if necessary . - Show the questions on the board , models the first question , and ask the Ss to listen - a) Do you know My Son, Nga? Nhi asked Nga if/ whether she knew My Son. 2. Practice : Substitution drill : - Oral drill . - T models the first question. Ss listen. - T has one student read the question, another student read reported sentence . - T gets feedback and corrects. - Have some Ss to write the reported sentences on the board. * Answer key: b) Nhi asked Nga if/ whether it was far from Ha Noi. c) Nhi asked Nga if/ whether My Son was in Quang Nam province. d) Nhi asked Nga if/ whether many people lived in My Son. E ) Nhi asked Nga if/ whether many tourists visited My Son every year. f) Nhi asked Nga if/ whether Nga wanted to visit My Son. III/ Language Focus 3: 1. Presentation : - Set the scene : " Nga answered Nhi' questions . She then gave Nhi some additional information . Use the words to write about the information that Nga gave to Nhi ." - Word cue drill: T shows the word cue chart on the board and models the first sentence . a) tell/ how/ go/ there Nga told Nhi how to go there. S V O question word to infinitive.

(167) 2. Practice Writing drill: - Ask the Ss to say the next sentence . - T gives feedback and corrects. - Have the Ss do the rest of the exercises orally with the same steps , then ask Ss to go to the board and write complete sentences . * Answer key: b) Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets. c) Nga pointed out where to buy souvenirs (chỉ (tay). d) Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An. e) Nga told Nhi what to do there during the visit. IV / Languages focus 4: 1. Presentation : T elicits language target from Ss. Ss answer individually . 1. I want to go out at weekend. (S + V + to infinitive) 2. She enjoys swimming very much. (S + V + V-ing) 3. He can speak many languages (S + modal V + infinitive) - Give the Ss the lists of words used the same " want / enjoy " and "can" . -a/ To- infinitive : ask , get , tell , advise (+ 0) , request , intend , hope , wish , promise , refuse ... -b/ Bare- infinitive : can , may , must , will , shall , would , should , would rather , be able to , …. - c/ V-ing : avoid , dislike , enjoy , finish , keep , mind , practice , stop , suggest , … 2. Practice : -Ask Ss to open their books , read and complete the passage with the right form of the verbs. - Have the Ss work in pairs within 3 minutes . - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct and have a student read the whole paragraph aloud . - Ask Ss to write 6 sentences of their own, using the three verbs form above. HOMEWORK : - Language 1 :. Turn the passive sentences into the active . - Language 3 : write the complete sentences of their own with the questions words given . - Copy the exercises in your notebooks.Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready to revise units from unìt12 to unit 14.. . Date of preparation 3 / 4 / 2012. Period 92 :. REVISION. A. Aims: To revise the vocabulary and grammar points which Ss learnt in U12-14 . To introduce the exercises in test 4 B. Objective : Ss can remember all vocabulary and grammar points , and know how to do exercises in test 4 . C. Teaching aids : Posters , textbook . D/ Ways of working : individual , pairs , groups . E/ Procedure : I. Language focus : 1/ -Past progressive- Past progressive with when & while * Presentation : T draws the pictures and asks : a/ What was Nam doing when the phone rang ?.

(168) b/ What happened while Nam was taking a shower ? - Ss answer : a/ Nam was taking a shower when the phone rang . S + was / were + V-ing + when + S + V 2 / V-ed . b/ The phone rang while Nam was taking a shower . S + V2 / V-ed + while + S + was / were + V-ing . * Practice : Gap fill - Hang the poster on the board and have the Ss work in pairs within 3 minutes . - Ss work in pairs and put the correct form of the verbs . 1/ I ( walk ) ………home when I ( meet ) ………Mr and Mrs Smith . 2/ I ( hurt ) ……….my back while I ( work ) …….. in the garden . 3/ Hoa ( burn ) ……….her hand while she ( cook ) ………dinner . 4/ Minh ( watch ) ……….TV when the phone ( ring ) ………….. - Call on some pairs to give the answers and correct . 2/ Present Progressive tense with always: * Presentation - Ask the Ss to retell the present progressive tense ( the form , the uses ) with " always " - Ss answer : S + is/ am / are / + always + V-ing . - Elicit the model sentences from the Ss and read . Ss repeat in chorus , in pairs ( some pairs ) * Practice : - Stick the poster with the conversation on the board , ask the SS to work individual and complete within 2 minutes . - Collect Ss' answers and correct . Have the Ss practice in pairs . 3/ Passive forms : Be + Past participle . * Presentation : - Ask the Ss to match the words in column A with the forms in column B . - Ss work in pairs within 2 minutes . - Call on the Ss to give their answers . - Have the Ss copy . A . Tenses 1. Present simple 2. past simple 3. future simple 4. present perfect * How to change into passive : Active : S +. B . Form a. Was / were + Past participle b. have/ has + been + Past participle c. Is / am / are + Past participle e. will / can / should / must …+ Past participle V. +. O. Passive : S + be + P.P + by + O * Practice - Stick the poster on the board . - Have the Ss work in individual then share with a partner . - Collect the Ss' answers and correct . * 1/ Put the correct form of the verbs : a/ Christmas songs ( perform ) ……………every year . b/ A new Supermarket ( build ) ……………next year . * 2/ Change into passive voice : a/ Miss Thanh taught me to draw the Christmas cards . b/ Nam can answer most of the questions . 4/ compound word : * Presentation : - T has the Ss remind the form of the compound word . + N - V-ing + N - Give examples and ask the Ss to rewrite the sentences using the compound word * Practice - Stick the poster on the board . - Have the Ss work in pairs then share with partners ..

(169) - Collect the Ss' answers and correct . a/ China is the country where they export labors . b/ This is the festival in which people have their birds singing . 5/ Reported speech * Presentation - Ask the Ss to remind the structures : - T asks " Do you know My Son , Hoa ?" " Yes, I do . It is in Quang Nam Province . " - Have the Ss report : T asked Hoa if / whether she knew My Son and she said that she did and it was in Quang Nam Province . - Elicit the structures from the Ss : + Yes/ No questions : S + asked ( + O ) + if / whether + S + V .. + Statement : S + said (that ) + S + V .. * Practice - Stick the poster on the board . - Have the Ss work in groups of four within 3 minutes then share with partners . - Collect the Ss' answers and correct . a/ Nga asked her brother :" Can you answer this question ? " - " No, I can't . I can't answer the question ." b/ Nhi asked Tim :" Do you live in Da Nang City ? " -" Yes , I do . I live in American ." 6/ Question words before to-inf 7/ Verb + to-inf and bare- infinitive : - T reminds the Ss the verbs following to - infinitive , and bare- infinitive then gives the examples . - Ss answer in individual . - Have Ss put the verbs in the correct form : to-infinitive , bare- infinitive , verb- ing . - Ss work in individual . 8/ Vocabulary : A vocation abroad.- Wonders of the world.- Festivals II. Skills 1. Writing : - Rewrite the sentences . ( Ss did in the first part ) Make meaningful sentences from the following cues : 1. . He / ask / me / how / go / there / soon . 2. We/ can not / visit / temple / because / it / repair . 3. I / have dinner / some friends / 8 yesterday evening . 4. A tourist / ask / if / Phong Nha Cave / Quang Binh Province . 5. Would / you / mind / turn off / lights ? 6. Brother/ decide / spend / all / summer vacation / study / World Heritage Sites / Viet Nam . 2. Reading : - Read the text and do the exercises 3. Listening Listen to the teacher’s reading and fill in the blanks @ Model test : If there isn't enough time , Ss may do at home . I. Underline the correct answer that best complete the sentences. 1. Millions of Christmas cards....................every year. (were sent/ are sent/ send) 2. Water..............most of the Earth's surface. (cover/ covers/ is covered) 3. The gate.................at 6.30 pm every day. (lock/ locks/ is locked) 4. A contest in which participants fetch water from the river is called a................. contest. (water-fetch/ fetching- water / water- fetching) 5. John is very fond ................music. (on/ at/ of)We stayed here and enjoyed ................... to classical music. (listen/to listen /listening) 6. Wine is made ..................grapes. (in/ of/ from) 7. They are good friends. They ...................each other for a long time. (know/ knew/have known) 8. Can you tell me where...................? (does she/ she is / is she) 9. Sydney Opera House...................in 1973. (is completed/ completed/ was completed) 10. You often feel ...................when you have nothing to do. (bored/ boring/famous) 11. A piece of information that helps you find out the answer is a.............. (answer/news/ clue) 12. Stonehenge- a famous world landmark is in ....................(Australia/ England/ Egypt) 13. We stayed here and enjoyed ................... to classical music. (listen/to listen /listening).

(170) II. Read the passage and answer the questions below. Vietnam’s New Year is celebrated according to the Lunar calendar. It is officially known as Tet Nguyen Dan, or Tet. It begins between January twenty- first and February nineteenth. The exact day changes from year to year. Vietnamese people usually make preparations for the holiday several weeks beforehand. They tidy their houses, cook special food, clean and make offerings on the family alters. On the New Year’s Eve, people sit up to midnight to see the New Year in, and then they put on new clothes and give one another the greetings of the season. Tet lasts ten days. The first three days are the most important. Vietnamese people believe that how people act during those days will influence the whole year. 1. What is Viet Nam’s New Year known as? 2. When does the Lunar New Year begin? 3 What do Vietnamese people usually do to prepare for Tet? Eve? 5. How long does Tet last? most important?.. 4. What do people do on the New Year’s 6. Why are the first three days the. III. Rewrite the sentences as directed 1. Lan said to Nga,"Is Mount Everest the highest peak in the world?"(Đổi sang câu gián tiếp)-Lan asked Nga... 2. Yesterday when Tuan(arrive).........home, his mother(cook)........dinner (Dùng động từ trong ngoặc ở thì đúng) 3. They performed the first Christmas songs 800 years ago. (Đổi sang câu bị động) The first..................... 4. It is a contest in which participants have to make a fire. (Viết lại câu dung tính từ kép)-It is a...... 5. I didn’t know how I can play the game. (Viết lại câu dùng verb +infinitive)- .................. IV. Listen and fill in the gap 1. Mrs Robinson wants some marigolds because they .............................. at Tet . 2. Where does Mrs Robinson want Liz to go ? – She wants Liz to go to the ..................... 3. What does Mrs Robinson ask Mrs Nga ? – She asks Mrs Nga to show her ................... VI. Make meaningful sentences from the following cues : 1. He / ask / me / how / go / there / soon . 2. A tourist / ask / if / Phong Nha Cave / Quang Binh Province. * Homework Revision Unit 12-14.- Be ready for one period test .. PERIOD 89 : ONE PERIOD TEST A / Aim: Ss do the exercises in the test . B/ Teaching aids : C / Procedure : Nhận biết Chủ đề. Vận dụng. TN. TL. TN. TL. TN. TL. Số câu / Điểm. Số câu / Điểm. Số câu / Điểm. Số câu / Điểm. Số câu / Điểm. Số câu / Điểm. I. Listening II. Reading. Thông hiểu. 3 2. 1.0. 1.5. TỔng. 3 4. 2.0. 6. 1.5 3.0.

(171) III. L. Focus. 6. 1.5. 6. 12 3.0. 1.5. IV. Writing Tổng. 5 11. 10 4.0. Họ & Tên : ....................................... Lớp : 8 /...... 2.5. 5 3.5. 26 2.5. 10. BÀI KIỂM TRA 45 PHÚT - LẦN 4 Môn : Tiếng Anh 8 - Đề 1 A/ Listen : Nghe và điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống : (1.5ms) The Robinson family are making preparations for Tet. Mrs Robinson wants her husband to go to the flower market to buy ....................and a bunch of marigolds. She also needs Liz, her daughter, to go to the market to buy some candiesand a packet of ................. And she is going to Mrs Nga’s house to learn ............................ B/ Language focus : Chọn 1 từ đúng trong ngoặc , rồi viết vào khoảng trống : (3ms) 1.The family climbed in and paddled …………….. to the middle of the lake. ( of/ in / out ) 2. Christmas songs .................... everywhere. (perform /are performing /are performed) 3. Japan has a big ........................... industry . (car-making / making - car / car - made ) 4. They told their children .................. up the tree . (don't climb /not climb/ not to climb) 5. She asked me ……………. I liked coffee or not . ( if / as / whenever ) 6. Choose the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently :.............. ( compile / sing /marine / fix ) 7. Viet Nam is a ................ ( rice-exporting country / rice-export country / rices-export country ). 8.What ........... at 8 o’clock last night ? (did you do / were you doing / are you doing ) 9.In the rice cooking festival, a fire ................... in the traditional way. (is made , making, make) 10. I don’t know how ............. there. ( get / getting / to get) 11. You are always .................. your homework . (fotget / forgets / forgetting ) 12. We stayed here and enjoyed ................... to classical music. (listen/to listen /listening) C/ Reading : (3ms) Đọc đoạn văn rồi rồi làm bài tập bên dưới : THE RICE- COOKING FESTIVAL This report shows how the rice cooking festival was held . The festival was held in…(1)………… house yard about one kilometer away from a river . There were three competitions : water-fetching, firemaking and rice- cooking . The festival took one day . In the water-fetching contest one person (2) …………… each team had to run to the river to get the water. In the fire- making contest two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way. They tried to rub pieces of bamboo (3)……………… to make the fire. Six people from each team took part in the rice- cooking contest. They had to (4) …………….. the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. After the three contests, all the points were added and the Thon Trieu team won the grand prize. The festival was wonderful. A/ Chọn từ đúng để hoàn thành đoạn văn trên: (1,0 m ) 1. A . common B. Commune C. communal 2. A. from B. to C. of 3. A. each other B. together C. one another 4. A to separate B. separate C. deliver B/ Trả lời các câu hỏi sau ( 2,0 ms ) 1/What is the name of the festival ? - ……………………………………………… 2/ How many contests were there in the rice- cooking festival ? What were they ? - …………………………………………………………………… 3/ What did people do to make the fire in the fire- making contest ? - …………………………………… 4/ What did people have to do before they cooked the rice ? - …………………………………………….

(172) D/ Writing : ( 2,5ms ) Làm theo yêu cầu trong ngoặc đơn : 1/ Hoa said , " I must go to the music room now.” (Viết câu bắt đầu bằng từ cho sẳn) - Hoa ……………………………………………….................................... 2/ They opened the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco in 1973 .( Đổi sang câu bị động ) - ................................................................................................... 3/ The students / ask / their teacher / how/ travel / Hue / last week .(Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu) - .................................................................................................................. 4/ It is a farm which raises chickens.(Viết lại câu dùng “compound word”) - It is a ..................... ..................................................................................... 5/ I said to him: “Can you speak English ?”. (Chuyển sang câu gián tiếp) - I ..................................................................................................... **************************************** Họ & Tên : ...................................... BÀI KIỂM TRA 45 PHÚT - LẦN 4 Lớp : 8 /..... Môn : Tiếng Anh 8 - Đề 2 A/ Listen : Nghe và điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống : (1.5ms) 1. Let's start with Sydney. It will be a dry day in Sydney today, and windy . For the ………………, the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty -six degrees. 2. London is going to have a……………… day . It will be very cold . 3. Bangkok will be warm and dry ,with a low of …....... centigrade and a high of thirty- two . B/ Language focus : Chọn 1 từ đúng trong ngoặc , rồi viết vào khoảng trống : (3ms) 1. We stayed here and enjoyed ................... to classical music. (listen/to listen /listening) 2.In the rice cooking festival, a fire ................... in the traditional way. (is made , making, make) 3.. She told me .................. to travel to Hoi An Town. ( where / what / how ) 4. Chicago is often ( spoken / talked / called ) “The Windy City”. 5.It was late , so we decided ( take / taking / to take) a taxi home. 6. The Great Wall is one of the ( buildings / walls / wonders ) of the world. 7. She asked me ( if / because / as ) I liked music . 8. Our uncle phoned while I and my sister …… a movie on TV last night.(watched /watch/ were watching ) 9. Viet Nam is a ................ ( rice-exporting country / rice-export country / rices-export country ). 10.His car ....................yesterday afternoon. ( washes / was washing / was washed ) 11. I don’t know how ............. there. ( get / getting / to get) 12.Choose the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently :................. ( compile / sing /marine / fix ) C/ Reading : (3ms) Đọc đoạn văn rồi rồi làm bài tập bên dưới : My name’s Lien. I have just returned from a five-day vacation in Hoi An, one of the world’s heritages. I went there by bus. I stayed in a (1)................. near Cua Dai beach called The Riverside Hotel. It was big and comfortable. Many people (2)................ it was one of the best hotels in Hoi An. The weather was fine. It was sunny but not very hot. Every morning I went jogging, then I sunbathed (3)................ the beach. I saw a lot of nice old houses and visited many beautiful places, such as Phuc Kien pagoda. I also tried some local .(4)............. . I liked Hoi An noodles best. People in Hoi An were very friendly. A. Gạch chân đáp án đúng để hoàn thành đoạn văn : 1. beach hotel house 2. said says asked 3. in on to 4. drink food flowers B.Trả lời câu hỏi sau : 1. Where did Lien go for her vacation ? - ................................................................. 2. How long did she stay there ? - ................................................................. 3. What did she see there ? - ................................................................. 4. What did she think about people in Hoi An ? - ....................................................... D/ Writing : ( 2,5ms ) Làm theo yêu cầu trong ngoặc đơn : 1/ Hoa said , " I have to go to the school library now.” (Viết câu bắt đầu bằng từ cho sẳn).

(173) - Hoa ……………………………………………….................................... 2/ Clement Clarke Moore wrote this poem in 1823. ( Chuyển sang câu bị động) - ................................................................................................... 3/ The students / ask / their teacher / how/ travel / Hue / last week .(Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu) - .................................................................................................................. 4/ It is a farm which raises chickens.(Viết lại câu dùng “compound word”) - It is a .......................................................................................................... 5/ " Do many tourists visit the citadel ?" Nga asked Hoa ( Chuyển sang câu gián tiếp ) - ................................................................................................................... KEYS Đề1: A/ Listening : (1,5ms) 1. some peach blossoms 2. dried watermelon seeds 3. to make spring rolls *Tape script: Mrs Robinson: John, I want you to go to the flower market for me, please Mr Robinson: What do I have to buy? Mrs Robinson: Some peach blossoms and a bunch of flowers Mr Robinson : What sort of flowers? Mrs Robinson: Marigolds, because they are traditional at Tet Mr Robinson : Anything else? Mrs Robinson: No, but I need Liz to do a few things Liz : What’s that, Mom? Mrs Robinson: Are you busy? Liz : No. Do you need something? Mrs Robinson: Yes. Go to the market and pick up some candies and one packet of dried watermelon seeds , please Liz : Okay. What are you going to do? Mrs Robinson: I’m going to Mrs Nga’s. She’s going to show me how to make spring rolls B/ Language focus : (3ms) 1. out 2. are performed 3. car-making 4. not to climb 5. if 6. compile 7. rice-exporting country 8. were you doing 9. is made 10. to get 11 . forgetting 12 . listening. C/ Reading : A/ (1m) 1. c 2. from 3. B 4. B B/ (2ms) 1/ It's the rice cooking festival . 2/ There were three . They were water- fetching , fire- making , and rice- cooking . 3/ They tried to rub pieces of bamboo together to make the fire . 4/ They had to separate the rice from the hush before they cooked rice . D/ Writing : (2,5ms) 1/ Hoa said you had to go to the music room then. 2/ The Golden Gate Bridge was opened in San Francisco in 1973. 3/ The students asked their teacher how to travel to Hue last week. 4/ It is a chicken-raising farm . 5/ I asked him if ( whehter) he could speak English.. Đề2: A/ Listening : (1,5ms) 1. temperature 2. humid *Tape script:. 3. twenty-four degrees.

(174) 1. Let's start with Sydney. It will be a dry day in Sydney today, and windy. For the temperature, the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty-six degrees. 2. London is going to have a humid day . It will be very cold with a low of minus three and a high of seven. 3. Bangkok will be warm and dry ,with a low of twenty-four degrees centigrade and a high of thirtytwo . B/ Language focus : (3ms) 1. out 2. are performed 3. car-making 4. not to climb 5. if 6. compile 7. rice-exporting country 8. were you doing 9. is made 10. to get 11 . forgetting 12 . listening. C/ Reading : A/ (1m) 1. c 2. from 3. B 4. B B/ (2ms) 1/ She went to Hoi An for her vacation . 2/ She stayed there (for) 5 days . 3/ She saw a lot of old houses and many beautiful places. 4/ Peole in Hoi An ( they) were very friendly. D/ Writing : (2,5ms) 1/ Hoa said She had to go to the school library then. 2/ This poem was written by Clement Clarke More in 1823. 3/ The students asked their teacher how to travel to Hue last week. 4/ It is a chicken-raising farm . 5/ Nga asked Hoa if ( whehter) many tourists visited the citadel.. Date of preparation 10/4/2011. Period 90 :. unit. COMPUTERS Getting started, Listen& Read-P.138,139. A/ Aims: -To help the Ss find out the advantages of computers and practice the dialogue about computers .-To get Ss to differentiate facts from opinions through reading. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the dialogue and do exercise ; express their opinions about the problem. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, pictures , posters , cassette , tape . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Language content : - Vocabulary : Words relating to computer . - Grammar point : present perfect with "yet" and " already" . E/ Procedure: I .GETTING STARTED: Brainstorming Computers can help us: - save time relax - learn interestingly advantages - design houses, bridges of computer be convenient - calculate very fast.

(175) - computers are easy to store information - computers are quick in giving answers to our questions - relax by playing video games , listening to music ,…….. II. LISTEN AND READ : (make Ss interested in the new topic/theme) 1. Pre-teach: - (to) connect [ translation ] - plug(n) [realia] - socket(n) [revision] - manual(n) [ the ditto/ a book coming with a machine tells you know to use / operate the machine ] - a printer [ Picture] -guarantee(n) [ situation]  Checking vocabulary.: R . O . R 2. Set the scene: Nam and his father are talking about the problem of the printer they’ve bought. What happens to it? -Ask the Ss to listen to the tape twice ® choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs . - T corrects their pronunciation . 3. Grammar point: - Have you turned it on yet? Form: Have/ Has + S + PP + yet? Tense: Present perfect + yet ® diễn tả hành động chưa xảy ra. - I have already done it. Form: S + have/ has + already + PP Tense: Present perfect + already ® diễn tả hành động xảy ra sớm hơn so với mong đợi. 4. Exercises : a. Fact or opinion? - Before Ss read , T explains some difficult sentences / phrases : " There shouldn't be anything wrong with it …" - T runs through the statements Fact or Opinion. Ss work in individual . - T gives Ss 8 min to read the dialogue silently and give the answers. Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary. Answer key: a) F b) O c) O d) O e) F f) O b. Answer the questions : - Get the Ss to answer the questions on the poster . - Ss work in pairs , then share with another pairs . a. Who bought the printer ? b. Is the printer working ? c. Where did he buy ? d. Is it under guarantee ? - Collect Ss' answers and write on the board . III . HOMEWORK :. Do Ex 1, 2 P 90-91. Practice the dialogue again . Be ready for SPEAK + LISTEN. .

(176) Date of preparation 10 / 4 /2011. unit 15. COMPUTERS Period 91 Lesson 2. Speak, Listen- P.139,141. A/ Aims: To get Ss to practice in expressing agreement and disagreement. To practice listening for details about the instructions on how to get a drink from a machine . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use some common expressions to express agreement and disagreement. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, pictures D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work E/ Procedure:  Warm up: Guessing game: Do you think that....? Example: Do you think that computers are helpful? A. SPEAK : I. PRE-SPEAKING : 1/ Brainstorming : Useful expressions to express agreement and. disagreement. Opinion I like... I don’t like... I feel... I don’t believe... 2/ Matching:. Agreement So do I. I agree. You are right. Neither do I.. Degree of agreement I agree, but... Yes, but on the other hand.... Disagreement I disagree. I can’t agree with you. No, I think....

(177) 1. Reading a comic + b 2. Playing in the rain + c 3. Driving a car + a 4. Foreign food + d. II . WHILE-SPEAKING. :. - T gives the picture and models . Ss repeat in chorus, in pairs ( some pairs ) - Give the cues . / stick the poster on the board . - Give a model to a picture a . a. * Driving a car is very difficult . - I disagree . I think it is very easy once you get used to it . * Learning to drive a car can be challenging . - You're right . It is difficult to get used to driving in traffic . * If you don't learn to drive properly , a car can be dangerous . - I agree . You can kill someone if you hit them with a car . - Have some good pairs demonstrate the dialogue again . - Ask the Ss to work in pairs , using the pictures , the cues . ORAL DRILL: T: I think driving a car is easy. Ss: I disagree. I think it’s difficult to drive a car. / Or: So do I. - Ss use the adjectives in the box on page 140 to express their opinions. b) Reading a comic/ Looking at the pictures in comic books ( boring, fun, time-consuming, interesting ) c) Playing in the rain ( fun, interesting, entertaining ) d) Foreign food/ Hamburgers , pizza , French fries , soda (delicious, fun to eat, unhealthy) - Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class . - Present the dialogue and have the Ss repeat sentence by sentence , in chorus , in pairs ( open pairs ) . - Have the Ss make similar dialogues referring the cues on page 140 to replace the information. (one cue ) - Ask the Ss to practice the rest cues at home . B. LISTEN : I. PRE-LISTENING : 1/ Pre teach: - sequenced (adj.): được sắp xếp theo trình tự - (to) indicate - change (n): tiền lẻ - (to) insert (the coins) * Set the scene: How to buy a drink from a machine and then complete the flow chart . - Put the flow chart on the board and have the Ss copy it into their exercise books..

(178) - T gets Ss to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart. Then ask the Ss to guess the words in the gaps . starting/ stopping point answers. :. questions. II . WHILE-LISTENING: Gap fill - T asks Ss to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the gaps .. - T plays the tape 2 or 3 times; Ss listen. - Ss fill in the gaps with the information they’ve heard. Then pair compare with their partners. Answer key: a) Do you have the correct change? b) Yes c) What do you want to drink? d) Take it. III. POST-LISTENING : Write- it- up ( if there is enough time ) - Have Ss write a set of instructions on how to get a drink from a machine, using the flow chart. HOMEWORK : - Write their writing in the notebooks . Complete the dialogue in your notebooks . Do Ex in workbooks. Be ready for one period test correction .. .

(179) Date of preparation: 15 / 4 / 2011. PERIOD 92 :. CORRECTION OF TEST 4. A/ Aims: -To help Ss identify the typical and common mistakes in their paper tests . - To help Ss remind of the grammar points relating to the test . B/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, and the whole class C/ Materials : posters D/ Procedure: I/ Running through the test :  Hand out Ss's papers (after they have been marked)  Ask Ss to answer the questions : a/ How many parts are there in the test ? b/ What are they ? ( What must we do in part I, II,..) II/ Revising the grammar points and vocabulary relating to the test : - T elicits the target languages from Ss .  Reported speech : Yes/ No questions and statements .  Past progressive with "while " and " when " .  Present progressive with " always" .  Passive form .  Verbs + To- infinitive , bare- infinitive , Verb-ing .  Question words before to- infinitive .  Compound words . - The words to talk about learn a language , their report card ..

(180) III/ Talking about the results of their tests : - Not many Ss understand , remember the structures, words and do the test well. - No one gets 10 marks . - Most of the weak Ss can't rewrite the sentences using reported speech, change into passive voice , … - Some can't answer the questions in reading and rewrite the sentences . - Some Ss have many mistakes about spelling . IV/ Correction :  Ask them to find out their mistakes and correct themselves first (if necessary).  Have the whole class correct the test . I. Listening : - T sticks the poster with the wrong sentences on the board and let Ss listen to the tape again and the whole class correct. - Correction . II/ Language focus : A/ Choose the correct word : - Ask Ss who have the wrong answers to read aloud and the whole class correct . - Get Ss to explain and say why they must choose that word . - Correction . III/ Reading : - T sticks the poster with wrong sentences on the board then runs through and explains the difficult phrases and sentences in the text . - Have the whole class correct . 2/ Answer the questions : - Have Ss practice in pairs. - Ask some Ss to write the anwers on the board and the whole class correct IV/ Writing : (2,5ms) - Ask five Ss who have the wrong sentences to write on the board . - Have the whole correct . - Correction. HOMEWORK: - T congratulates the Ss who have good and excellent tests and flays Ss who get bad marks , then encourages them to study harder . - To ask them to correct the tests by themselves again . - Be ready for U.15 - read .. .

(181) Date of preparation 18/4/2011. UNIT. COMPUTERS Period 93. Lesson 3. READ - P.141,142. A/ Aims: - To help the Ss read for information about how computer work in a university . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about how computer work in a university. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, cardboards . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Procedure: Warm up: Jumbled words - terpirn = printer - seumo = mouse - recsen = screen - bdoaryke = keyboard I. PRE-READING : 1. Pre teach: - freshman (n) = first year student at a college / university . - a jack = socket [ synonym/ realia ] - a bulletin board ( the ditto] - skeptical (adj.) [ translation] - impact (n): ảnh hưởng 2. Open prediction: - T introduces the topic of the text. - Ask Ss what they are going to read. Suggested questions: a) Do you believe that there is an university without library nowadays ? b)Do you know where we can get/ find and store information ? c) If we want to discuss something, do you know how can we do? - Ss answer . T writes Ss’ guess on the board. - Stick the poster with the statements on the board . - Run through the statements and get Ss to guess individually . - Collect SS' answers ..

(182) II. WHILE-READING :* True/ False statement: -Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions. - Ss read the text again then read the T/ F statements and decide if they are T or F - Call on some Ss to give their answers. - T gets feedback and corrects. *Answer key: a) T b) T c) T d) F: Ss don’t have to go to the computer rooms because college campuses now have computer jacks in every part of the university. III. POST-READING : * Comprehension questions: - Run through the questions . - Have the Ss read the text again and find the information in the text to answer . - Ask the Ss to work in pairs and compare their answers with their partners . - Call on some Ss to give their answers for the class and write on the board . a) It has no library. All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the university’s computers. b) All the information normally found in a library or messages normally found on a bulletin. c) A computer and a telephone line. d) With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great number of people can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly. e) Ss’ answer. HOMEWORK : - Write the answers in your notebooks. Write about how computers work in an university . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for WRITE/ P.142-3.. .

(183) Date : 22 / 4 / 2011. REVISION Period 94 +95 + 96 + 97 : A/ Aims : - To help the Ss revise the vocabulary relating to health , environment , traveling around Vietnam , festivals , wonders of the world , recycling ,… - Know the differences of the uses , and the forms of the simple present , future simple , present progressive , past simple , present perfect , past progressive in active and passive . - The form of the verbs like : verb + V-ing , / + to- infinitive / or bare- infinitive ; the structures with toinfinitive , present participle , past participle . - How to change from active to passive ; reported statements / yes/ no questions . - How to express the suggestions , requests , offers , promises , advise , and responds / reply . B/ Objective : Ss can remember the grammar notes revised and do the exercises relating them . C / Teaching aids : Textbook , posters . D/ Procedure : I/ Vocabulary : @ Brainstorming : - Wonders of the world / Viet Nam . - Situations which require first- aid . - Things to do to protect the environment . - Festivals - Traveling around Viet Nam and abroad . @ Multiple choice : - Hang the posters on the board , have the Ss work in pairs and choose a, b, c, or d for the following sentences . - Ss work in pairs then share with other pairs . - Give feedback and correct . 1/ She shows people …………the environment . a. how to protect b. how protect c. what protect d. what to protect . 2/ ……………means not buying products which are over packed . a. reducing b. recycling c. reusing d. reordering 3/ We……..around the lake in a canoe yesterday afternoon . a. drove b. rode c. cycled d. paddled 4/ Andrew studies tribes and likes …………. a. mountains - climbing b. mountain - climbing c. climbing -mountains d. climb- mountains 5/ The heads of four American ……………….are carved into Rushmore . a. presidents b. chair man c. head leader d. people ..

(184) 6/ Today we went on ……………tour around Asia . a. a eight- hours b. a eight - hour c. an eight- hours d. an eight - hour . 7/ His teammates were not fast so he………… them to run faster . a. shouted b. urged c. cried d. suggested 8/ They have to ………… the rice from the husk and then cook the rice . a. take b. bring c. separate d. make 9/ I can't read because the …………of the computer is too dark . a. screen b. plug c. monitor d. mouse . 10 / The doll ………….. in red is mine . a. dressed b. dressing c. is dressed d. is dressing @ Math the verbs in A with a phrase in B to have a complete phrase : A B 1 . to send a. a college degree 2. to have b. a friend 3. to complete c. the bedroom 4. to do d. with the computer 5. to tidy e. messages 6. to turn f. the printer 7. to call g. some housework 8. to work h. information through internet 9. to receive i . access to a computer 10 . to unplug j . off the television @ Use the correct form of the word in brackets for each gap . 1. A………is a machine that is connected to a computer and prints onto paper using ink . ( print ) 2. Mr Brown 's son is a normally …………….. child ( health ) 3. Your advice was very …………… , saving me a lot of time . ( use ) 4. Tom often tells us …………… stories after his Summer vacation . ( amuse ) 5. I read an interesting piece of …………. In the newspaper . ( inform ) II/ GRAMMAR POINTS : 1. Tenses : a. Presentation : - Ask the Ss to remind of the uses and forms of the present simple , past simple , present progressive , past progressive , present perfect , future simple . - Ss work in groups and write on the posters , the group which has the correct and faster answers is the winner . - Help the Ss distinguish the difference of these tenses . - Give feedback and correct . b. Practice : - Have the Ss complete the sentences , using the correct tense of the verbs in the brackets in pairs . - Ss work in pairs and give the answers . - Correction . 1. They ( build ) ………… a new hospital in my neighborhood right now . 2. I ( listen ) ………… to the radio when you (ring ) ………… the bell last night . 3. She asked me if I ( can ) …………. Lend her some money . 4. A: You ( see ) …………. The film " Titanic " yet ? B: Yes, I have . The film ( be ) ………… very sad . It ( make ) ………. Me cry . 5. Nam ( not / have ) ………….. his motorbike today . It ( repair ) …………….. right now . 6. A: Mark ( not / be ) ………….. here recently . B: Really ? When he ( go ) …………….? A: He ( leave ) …………….. here three months ago . 2/ The form of the verbs : a. Presentation : @ To- infinitive : - Have the Ss remind the structures with to- infinitive : * S + V + ( O ) + Wh + to- infinitive . * S + be + adjective + to- infinitive . * S + be + adjective + enough + ( for + O ) + to-infinitive . * S +V + O + (not ) + to- infinitive ..

(185) Ask , want , tell , get , advise , request , teach , warn , order , invite … - Instead of " in order to / so as to " + to- infinitive . - After some verbs : intend , decide , hope , mean , offer , promise , wish , refuse , agree, care , learn , wait @ Bare - infinitive : * S + V ( modal verbs ) + V - bare - infinitive . Can , may , must , might , will , would , should , could , would rather , have to , be able to , …. + Let's …. / why don't we / you …? / shall we ….? / can you …? Would you …?.......... + S + let / have / make + O ( person ) + V bare-infinitive . @ Verbs - ing : *S +V + V - ing . Avoid , dislike , enjoy , finish , keep , mind , practice , stop , deny , miss , complete , advise , suggest , understand , can't help , ……… * After some prepositions : about , of , with , without , on , at , in , after , before , ……… * After some phrasal verbs : to be / get used to ; to look forward to ; to have a good time ; to spend/ waste time ; to be busy ……….. * Used as an adjective to qualify a noun with doing meaning . @ Past participle : * in the present perfect tense : Have + P . P * in the passive form : Be + P .P * Used as an adjective to qualify a noun with passive meaning . b/ Practice : - Stick the posters on the board . - Have the Ss supply the correct verb forms . - Ask the Ss to work in individual then share with a partner . - Give feedback and correct . 1. We enjoy ……… ( swim ) along the river . 2. The form teacher has asked Jack ( collect ) ……………. The used paper . 3. Would you mind ( help ) ……………. Me with this work . 4. The children should ( use ) …………….. the computers . 5. This is the radio ( make ) …………… in China . 6. Is Black Pool ( visit ) ……………… by thousands of tourists . 7. My mother asked me if I ( do ) ………… my homework . 8. The rain has made the children ( stop ) …………… their games . 9. The man ( stand ) …………. Near the door is her father . 10. Mother requests her daughter not ( come ) …………… back home late . 3/ The passive form : a. Presentation : - Get the Ss to remind of the passive form of the verb in present simple , past simple , future simple , present perfect , past progressive . - Ask all the Ss to answer the questions and write on the small boards . - Correction . - Have the Ss say how to change into passive sentences . - Give feedback . b. Practice : - Stick the posters on the board . - Ask the Ss to work in individual and choose the correct answers then share with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give answers . - Correction . 1. The Summit of Mount Everest ( is reached / reached / was reached ) by two British members . 2. The Statue of Liberty ( is presented / was presented / presented / has been presented ) to the USA in 1876 . 3. Christmas Songs ( perform / are performed / performed / were performed ) for people 800 years ago . 4. the leader said that he ( is pleased / was pleasing / is pleased / Was pleased ) to award the prize to you . 5. The cupboard is open and everything ( is broken / was broken / has been broken / would be broken ) . 6. This is a machine which ( used / uses / is used / is using ) to wash clothes . 7. On Christmas Eve , people often ( are decorated / were decorated / decorating / decorate ) a tree . 8. Mount Rush More ( can be seen / could be seen / saw / can see ) from more than 100 kilometers away ..

(186) *Get the Ss to change the following sentences into the passive voice in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give the answers . - Correction . 1. Bell invented the telephone in 1876 . 2. They will laugh at you if you wear that silly hat . 3. People speak French and English in Canada . 4. They have just built a new church near my house . 4/ Reported statements / Yes- No questions : a. Presentation : - Remind the Ss of the structures then write on the board . - Ss give examples . - * Reported speech : S + { said that } + S +V + O { Said to someone that } * Reported Yes - No questions : S + asked + O + if / whether + S + V . ….. - Ask the Ss to remind of the things what must be changed in reported speech . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . b. Practice : - Ask the Ss to work in pairs and rewrite the sentences . - Ss work in pairs then share with another pairs and write on the board . - Give feedback and correction . 1. The old lady said to the man : " Can you read this letter ? " . 2. The teacher said to the boy :" Do you know the way to the post office in this city ? " 3. The child said to the beggar : " Are you very poor ? " . 4. He said :" My friend is coming next week . " 5. The boy said to his neighbor : " I am going on holiday tomorrow . " . 5/ Making and responding to offers , requests , promises , advice : a/ Presentation : - Have the Ss speak out how to make and respond to offers , promises , requests , advice . - Ss answer . T corrects . ( have the Ss use the structures in "speak" of U 9 and U11 . b. Practice : - Stick the posters on the board and ask Ss to check the most suitable sentences in individual then share with a partner . - Correction . - Have the Ss practice in pairs . 1/ A : Would you mind if I moved this wardrobe ? 4/ A: Shall I open the window ? Could you move this wardrobe , please ? Will you open the windows ? B : Yes, please . B: That would be nice . 2/ A: Would you like a cup of tea ? 5/ A : Can I get a drink ? Do you like a cup of tea ? Can I get you a drink ? 3/ A : I promise I will be punctual . B: No , thanks . I'm not thirsty . B : Don't forget . I'll wait . Sure . I'll do it . III/ READING : - To help the Ss read the dialogues and the passages learnt from U9 to U 15 for general or specific information - Give some kinds of exercises they will be able to do in reading skill : + Read and answer the questions . + Read and answer true / false statements . + Complete the text or the dialogue using the words given . + Multiple choice . IV / WRITING : 1/ Presentation: - Ask the Ss to rewrite all exercises in writing skill from U9 to U 15 . - Give the Ss some kinds of the exercises :.

(187) + Writing complete sentences . + Combining two sentences into a new one . + Ordering / Rearranging words . + Sentence transformation . 2/ Practice : - Stick the posters with the exercises on the board . - Run through the exercises . - Divide the class into 5 groups and ask one group to do two sentences . - Deliver the hand out to the Ss . - Let Ss work in groups. - Collect Ss' answers and ask the whole class to correct . * Do as directed in the brackets : 1/ " Is the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco ?" Hoa said to Tim . ( Change into reported speech ) . 2/ They built this house over 50 years ago . ( Change into passive form ) . 3/ " Could you take me home ? " ( Rewrite the sentence , using " Would you mind …? " ) 4/ Nam gets up early every morning . He doesn't want to be late for school . ( Combine into one sentence , using " In order to " ) . 5/ They haven't seen Jamie …………. Christmas . ( Complete sentence with " Since " or " For " ) 6/ Johnny said , " I don't know how to do this exercise ." ( Change into reported speech ) . 7/ Quoc TU Giam / establish / 1076 . ( Write sentence using the words given .) 8/ I hope ( finish ) …………….. ( paint ) the house by the end of the week . ( Put the verbs into the correct form ) 9/ correct / you / math exercise / me / mind / do / for / this / you ? ( Put the correct order of the words to complete the sentence ) 10 / A milk bottle can be reused thirty times . ( make question for the underlined words .) * Make meaningful sentences from the following cues : 1. Angkor Wat / Known / wonder / because / the largest temple / world . 2. The glass / collected / sent / factories / made / into / glassware. 3. What / you / do / when / alarm / sound ? 4. Mary / fall asleep / while / read magazine. 5. Would / if / I / smoke / here ? 6. She / ask / whether / Petronas Twin Tower / Malaysia / tallest building / world . 7. It / interesting / see / famous world landmark . 8. They / always / collect / used paper / waste things / not / pollute / environment. III/ Sample test : I. Chọn từ hoặc cụm từ đúng ở trong ngoặc để hiàn thành các câu sau : 1. The woman ………… a bag is Miss Lien . ( to carry / carrying / carried / carries ) 2. I was doing my homework ………………. the mailman came . ( because / but / when / why ) 3. …………. Is the festival often held ? - In the Temple yard .( when / where / who / why ) 4. Millions of Chrismas Cards ………………… every year . ( send / are sent / have sent / are sending ) 5. Nhi asked Nga ……….. she knew My Son . ( weather / did / does / whether ) 6. Do you mind if I ………… you a few questions ? ( ask / asking / asked / would ask ) 7. the Pyramid of Cheops is one of the seven old ……………….. of the world . ( temples / pagodas / wonders / heritages ) 8. Who ……….. the fountain pen ? - Lewis Warterman did . ( did invent / invented / was invented / inventor ) 9. ……………. I do the washing -up ? - NO, thanks . I can do it myself . ( can/ would / won't / shall ) 10 . Ba is studying very hard ……………….. pass the final exam .( for / in order to / so to / as to ) 11. It's dangerous ……………….. in the river . ( to swim / swim / swimming / swam ) 12 . I don't know how …………….. the game ( to play / playing / played / play ) 13. Would you mind ………….. the windows ? ( to close / closing / close / closed ) 14 . It is a contest in which participants have to fetch water from the river . It's a ……………………. Contest ( water- fetch / fetch-water / fetching water / water- fetching ) 15. Milk is ………… to the house by the mailman everyday . ( brings / bring / brought / to bring ) II. Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì hoặc dạng thích hợp : 1. Would you mind if I …………… ( turn on ) the television ?.

(188) 2. A : ……………….. ( you/ see ) the film Titanic yet ? B: Yes . I ………………..( see ) it last year . 3. The phone ( ring ) …………………….. while Tim was watching TV . 4. It was late , so I decided ( take ) ……………. A taxi home . 5. She ( write ) ………………… her report at 8 o'clock last night . III. Đọc đoạn văn sau và làm các bài tập A và B bên dưới : London is Britain's biggest city . It is a very old city ; but it isn't as old as Rome . London is a city of historic buildings and churches and it has many other places of interest . It also has some of the best museums in the world . London is very crowded in summer . It is a popular city with foreign tourists . It has more than eight million visitors a year . The city is famous for its shopping and department stores . London has a very good underground railway system . So it is easy for tourists to get round . In London there are a lot of restaurants where you can buy food from many countries. A. Viết T ( True ) sau câu đúng và F ( False ) sau câu sai theo nội dung đoạn văn : 1. London is older than Rome . 2. London is visited by a lot of foreign tourists every year . 3. There are many tourists attractions in London . 4. Restaurants in London sell food from many countries . B. Trả lời các câu hỏi sau : 1. Why is London very crowded in Summer ? 2. Why is it easy for tourists to travel around London ? IV. Viết lại các câu sau theo hướng dẫn trong dấu ngoặc đơn : 1. Miss Lien wrote this letter . ( Đổi sang câu bị động ) 2. " I'm from Australia , " Tom said . ( Tường thuật lời nói của Tom ) 3. " Do you want to visit My Son ? " Nga asked Tom . ( Tường thuật câu hỏi của Nga .) 4. Somebody cleans the room everyday . The room ……………………………………………………… 5. LAN said : " I'm living in London now ." LAN said that ……………………………………………… 6. Hoa asked me : " Do you want to visit London ? " …………………………………………………….. * Homework : - Learn all grammar points and vocabulary again . - Do all exercises again . - Be ready for the second term examination .. . Period 99. THE SECOND TERM EXAMINATION.

(189) Date of preparation 28 / 4 / 2011. UNIT 15. COMPUTERS Period 99 : Lesson 4. WRITE - P.142, 143. A/ Aims: To get the Ss to practice in writing instructions . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a set of instructions on how to use the printer . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters , pictures . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . E/ Procedure:  Checking up the old lesson : - Ss called say about how computers work in an university . I/ Pre- writing : 1/ Pre - teach vocabulary: - Use the pictures on page 142 to elicit the words from the Ss . + paper input tray (n) + power button (n) + icon (n) + (to) remove = (to) put something away + out path (n) * Checking technique : Matching : - Get the Ss to look at the exercise 1 ( page 142) and do the matching . - Ss work in individual then share with a partner . - Ask some Ss to give their answers and correct . @ Answer key : a) 3 b) 1 c) 4 d) 2 e) 6 f) 5 2/ Gaps fill : - Out the words on the board and ask the Ss to fill in the gaps with the right words if possible . - Ss work in individual then share with a partner . (1) (to) wait for ( someone / something ) (b) (2) (to) remove Ф something (d) (3) (to) turn on / off ( a machine ) (a) (4) (to ) plug in something (e) ( 5) (to) load Ф something (f) -Ask the Ss to give their answers and correct . II/ While - writing : - Ask the Ss to look at the pictures on page 143 and read the cues . - Have the Ss work in groups of four to outline the instructions . They can use these questions : a/ What's she removing and loading in the paper input tray ? b/ What's is she waiting for ? c/ What's on the computer screen ? d/ What's she doing then ? - Get some Ss to say out the instructions first ( 1 or 2 Ss for each sentence ) . - Ask Ss to write the instructions on the board and in their notebooks . - Ss work in individual . III/ Post- writing :.

(190) - Ask the whole class to correct and have some Ss read their writing before class , the look at the pictures and retell . - Give feedback and correct . IV/ Homework : - Write the instructions in the notebooks . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for language focus ..  Date of preparation 29 / 4 / 2011. UNIT 15. COMPUTERS Period 100 : Lesson 5. LANGUAGE FOCUS - P.144-146. A/ Aims: Further practice in using the present perfect ,comparison of the present perfect and past simple . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use "yet" and "already " to express the present perfect and use it to express complete and incomplete actions and recognize the difference between the present perfect and simple past . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, group work , pair work . E/ Procedure: * Warm-up: Lucky numbers ! ( Consolidation of tenses) Questions: 1. What does your mother do ? 2. What did you do last night ? 3. Lucky number ! 4. How often is Hue Festival held ? 5. Lucky number ! 6. What were you doing at 7 c 'clock last night ? 7. Guess what your parents are doing at the moment ? 8. Who often cooks in your family ? 9. Which grade will you be in next school year ? 10. Lucky number ! I/ Language focus 1: * Presentation. : - Set the scene. " Ba 's mother wanted him to do some housework while she was at the market. Ba made notes in his diary." Do homework √ Tidy the room x Turn off the washing machine √ Call and tell Aunt Le to have lunch √. - Show the chart on the board.. Call and taiiAunt Le to have. - Ask questions and elicit the answers from Ss. - Have Ss repeat and write the sentences on the board. □ Questions: T- Has Ba done his homework yet? S- Yes, he has already done his homework. T- Has Ba tidied the room yet? S- No, he hasn't tidied the room yet.. - Explain the form and the usage of the present perfect  Concept check: Present perfect with Yet and Already.  Use: Yet: used in questions and negative statements. Already: used in positive statements. ( the positions of "yet" and "already" in a sentence ).

(191) * Practice: Gap fill dialogue. - Let Ss do exercise 1 on page 144 in pairs . - Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue for the class . - Give feedback and correct . II/ Language Focus 2 (p.144). * Presentation. : - Sticks the poster with the flights on the board . - Ask the Ss to look at the flight information tables and ask questions to show the models . T- Has the flight to Vientiane departed yet? S- Yes, it has already departed. T-Has the flight from Los-Angeles arrived yet? S- No, it hasn't arrived yet. - Have the Ss repeat in chorus , in pairs ( some pairs ) * Practice: - Ask the Ss to take in turn to ask and answer the questions .( pair work ) - Call on some Ss to demonstrate the exchanges in front of the class . - Give feedback and correct . III/ Language Focus 3 : * Presentation: Use Vietnamese to elicit the models . 1. I've ever been to Hoi An  finished. 2. My parents have gone to Hoi An for 3 days  (incomplete). - Concept check: present perfect tense.  Use: - Finished action  indefinite time. - Incomplete action  for, since, recently...  Form: have/ has + past participle. * Practice: Grammar drill  Do exercise 3 on page 146. - Ask the Ss to look at a table on page 146 , read the statements and check (√ ) the correct column . - Have the Ss work in individual then share with a partner . - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct . Answer key Finished action A). √. B) C). √ √. D). √. E). √. F). √. G). Incomplete action. √. IV / Language Focus 4 : * Presentation: □ Revision. - Put the chart on the board and ask the Ss to read the sentences in pairs ..

(192) - Ask the Ss to decide which sentence is in the present perfect and which is in the past simple . 1. Her family moved to Quang Nam 2 years ago. 2. He has never met such an intelligent student before. 3. My brother has become more independent since he left home. 4. When did the second world war break out? Answer key: 1+4: Past simple  finished action with definite time. 2+3: Present perfect  an action taking place from the past to the present. * Practice: (Grammar Drill)  Do exercise 4 on page 146.  Answer key: see (1) Have you seen.... Did you see........ I saw................. not have (2) We haven't had.......... be (3) My parents have been.......... hear (4) Have you heard the news.... happen (5) What happened? have (6) He had an accident. fall (7) He suddenly fell. break (8) and broke. arrive (9) Have the plane arrived yet? Yes, it has. When did it arrive? It arrived...... - Call on some Ss to give their answers and correct . - Have some pairs play the role for class . V/ Homework : - Ask the Ss to write 4 sentences of their own 2 in the past simple and 2 in the present perfect . - Do exercises in workbook . - Be ready for U16 - Getting started + listen and read .. . Date of preparation 04 / 5 / 2011. UNIT. INVENTIONS Period 101 : Getting started, Listen& Read-P.147-149 A/ Aims: Reading for details about development of paper and how to produce chocolate. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters , cassette , tape ,pictures (p.147, 148), gird chart..

(193) D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Language content : - Vocabulary : Words relating to the process of producing chocolate and the development of paper . - Grammar point : Revise the passive form . E/ Procedure: * Checking up : - Look at the pictures and say how to use the printer . I .GETTING STARTED: - Get Ss to look at the pictures on page 147 and ask them some questions to evaluate how much they understand the pictures. + Where are they from? (picture a, b, c, e). + What is the man in picture a) doing? + What is it? (d) - Ask Ss to do the matching on page 147. - Ss read the sentences (a-e) and match them with the correct pictures in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give their answers . - Give feedback and correct. □ Answer key: A. b) B. c) C. e) D. a) E. d) II/ LISTEN AND READ : 1/ Pre-teach vocabulary : ( Use a flow chart and Vietnamese to elicit words ) - To crush [ mime ] - A process  manufacturing process - A mold [ realia/ picture] - Conveyor belt. [ translation] - To liquefy [ translation ] -To grind - ground - ground. - To manufacture = to produce  Checking vocabulary.: R . O . R 2. Set the scene: Tim Jones , Hoa 's America pen pal is visiting a chocolate factory with his class and his teacher , Mrs Allen . Mr Roberts , the factory foreman , is showing them around . -Ask the Ss to listen to the tape twice ® choral repetition , open pairs , closed pairs . - T corrects their pronunciation . 3. Language review : - Elicit the target language from the Ss . - Have Ss remind of the passive form of the verbs in the present simple tense . - Ask Ss to underline the passive sentences in the dialogue . - Get some to read and correct . 4. Exercises : a. Match the half sentences : - Before Ss read , T explains some difficult sentences / phrases : " Tim and Sam were going to touch the button …" - T runs through the half sentences . Ss work in individual . - T gives Ss 8 min to read the dialogue silently and give the answers. Then pair compare. - T can make Yes/ No questions to help Ss choose the right answers. - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects if necessary. Answer key: a) E b) D c) C d) F e) B f) A - Get Ss to write the full sentences in their notebooks . b. Grid : ( if there is enough time ) - Put the grid on the board and have the Ss copy . - Get the Ss to read the dialogue again and fill the grid . - Ss work in pairs , then share with another pairs . CHOCOLATE MANUFACTURING PROCESS 1. The beans are ……………………………………………………………….

(194) 2. The shells are ………………………………………………………………. 3. the beans are………………………………………………………………… 4. Cocoa butter , sugar , vanilla and milk ……………………………………… 5. The mixture is……………………………………………………………….. - Collect Ss' answers and write on the board . - Correction. * Homework : - Write the chocolate manufacturing process using the sequence markers . - Do exercises in workbook . - Learn new words by heart . - Be ready for Speak + listen .. . Date of preparation: 6 /5/2011. UNIT 16. INVENTIONS Period 102. Lesson 2. SPEAK + LISTEN < 149-151>. A/ Aims : - To help the Ss practice speaking about the inventions using the passive form. + Listening for details about the process of making paper. B/Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the inventions using the passive form and order sentences ( from listening . ) C/Teaching aids: Textbook, tape and cassette player , pictures , posters . D/ Ways of working : Individuals, pair work , group work D/ Procedure : * Revision : Slap the board . ( if there is enough time ) -. foreman. process. manufacture. remove. crush,.

(195) liquidize, grind pour mold conveyor belt - Ss work in two groups . I/ Pre-teach vocabulary: - T elicits the words from Ss. -Facsimile(n): [ picture] -Loudspeaker(n): [ realia] -Helicopter(n) [ translation] -Optical fiber(n) [ translation] -Reinforced concrete(n) [ the ditto] - Microphone : [ realia] -X-ray (n): [ explanation] -Laser(n): [translation] - vat (n) [ picture/ drawing] - (to) drain [ explanation] - roller (n) [ picture] - pulp (n) [ question: what is used to make paper] II/ SPEAK: 1. PRE-SPEAKING : - Have the Ss read the model dialogue on page 149 in chorus , in pairs ( open pairs ) . - Let Ss know what they are going to do : Ask and answer the questions about the inventions to fill in the missing information . - Run through all the invention, inventor in student A and student B -T elicits the sentences from Ss and reminds them of the passive form of the past simple tense. 2. WHILE-SPEAKING : * Exercise 1: Word cue drill: -Ask the Ss to look at the tables and model the exchanges .( using the good students ) - Ss repeat in chorus , in pairs ( open pairs, closed pairs). STUDENT A Invention ( What). Date (When) 1816. Inventor (Who) Friedrich koenig Karl. Sauerbronn. Nationality German. Elias Howe. America. C.W. Rice Igor Sikorsky Peter Carl Goldmark Narinder Kapany Gordon Gould. America. Facsimile Reeinforced concrete Microphone X-ray Loudspeaker Helicopter Color television Laser. Invention(What) Printing press Bicycle Facsimile Sewing machine Microphone Helicopter Optical fiber. 1845 1849 1878 1895 1924 1950 1955 1958. STUDENT B Date(When) Inventor(Who) 1810 Friedrich koenig 1816 1843 Alexander Bain Elias Howe 1849 F.J. Monier D.E.Hughes 1895 Wilhelm Konarad 1924 C.W. Rice 1939 Peter Carl Goldmark 1955 Gordon Gould. America German America. Nationality German English French America German America.

(196) Example Exchanges: A: When was the facsimile invented? B: It was invented in 1843. A: Who was it invented by? B: By Alexander Bain. Student A 1/ What / invent / Friedrich Koenig? // When / invent ? 2/ What / invent / 1816 ? 3/ What / invent / Elias Howe? 4/ Who /Reinforced concrete / invent / by? Student B 1/ Who / bicycle / invent / by? 2/ When / sewing machine / invent ? 3/ What / invent / 1895 ? * Exercise 2: Reporting the findings to the teacher. * Word cue drill: -T runs through all the cues. - T demonstrates the first two cues . Ss repeat in chorus , in individual . -Practice individually. 1/ The facsimile / invent / Aleander Bain / 1843. 2/ The Printing press / invent / Friedrich Koenig / 1810. 3/ The Sewing machine / invent / Elias Howe/ 1845. 4/ The Reinforced concrete / invent / F.J. Monier / 1849. 5/ The bicycle / invent / Karl D. Sauerbronn / 1816. Example: The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843. 3/. POST-SPEAKING : Write it up ( at home ) III/. LISTEN : 1. PRE- LISTENING : * Exercise 1 P. 150 -T explains the requirement. * Setting the scene : listening a passage about papermaking process.( T asks Ss : What is this? –The papermaking machine) * Open predictions: -T runs through all the sentences. -Ss guess the order . Ss work in individual . -T collects Ss’ predictions and write on the board . 2/ WHILE- LISTENING : -T plays the tape, Ss listen to the tape the first time and check their predictions then share with a partner . - Ss listen to the tape twice and decide their answers. Then pair compare . -T gets the answers from Ss. - Ss listen to the tape again and correct their answers. -T gives the answers and corrects if necessary. * Answer key: a/ simple b/ same / 200 c/ left d/ rollers * Exercise 2: Listen and put the sentences into the correct order. -Ss listen to the tape twice and order the sentences into suitable process of making paper.( individually -pair compare ) - T collects Ss’ answers. -Ss listen to the tape again and correct. -T gives the feedback and correct if necessary. * Answer key: c- d- a- e- g- f- b 3 / POST-LISTENING : Retell the papermaking process. - Ss work in groups . ( if there is enough time , Ss may do at home . ) * HOMEWORK: - Practice Speak + Listen; Do exercises in workbook. - Learn new words by heart . - Do exercises in workbook ..

(197) -Be ready for Read and revision for the second term .. . Date of preparation: 6 /5/2011. UNIT. INVENTIONS Period 103. Lesson 3. READ < 151- 152>. A. Aims: - To help the Ss read for details about inventions. B. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to fill in the gaps and understand the poem . C. Teaching aids: Textbook, posters , D/ Ways of working : Individuals, pair work , group work . D. Procedure : *Warm up: Guessing game : What inventions ? - Ask the Ss each think of an invention or write it down on a piece of paper . - Call on one student to the front of the class or ask the rest of the students ask him/ her - Yes or no questions . Ex : Are you thinking of …………? - The chosen student can only answer Yes or No . I. PRE- READING: 1. Pre-teach: - T elicits the words from Ss. - microwave(n) :[picture] vi song - toaster (n): [ picture ] máy nướng bánh mì -ping : [mime/ example] kêu lanh canh - vacuum(n): [ the ditto] máy hút bụi -doom (n) [ the ditto] răng rắc -boom (n) [ explanation] oang oang - chugga- chug (n) tiếng xình xịch 2. Open predictions: Matching.

(198) Verse 1 • • a. Instrument invented by Alexander. Verse 2 • • b. Appliances that cook food. Verse 3 • • c. Appliances that clean or dry things. II. WHILE – READING : 1/ Exercise 1: Matching - Get Ss to read the poem on page 151 . - Ask the Ss some questions to help them understand the reading more . + What's the first verse about ? + Is the second verse about the appliances used in the kitchen ? + What are " doom , chugga- chug , vroom , boom : ? -T gives Ss 5 minutes to read the text and check their prediction.( Ss work in individual then share with a partner ) -T collects Ss’ answers and corrects. * Answer key: Verse 1 + b ; verse 2 + c ; Verse 3 + a 2/ Exercise 2: Gap- fill -T helps Ss understand the requirement. - Tell Ss to read the sentences carefully and fill in the gaps with the inventions taken from the poems . -T gives Ss 5 minutes to read the text again and complete the sentences.( Ss work in pair then compare with other pairs . ) -T collects Ss’ answers and corrects. * Answer key : 1/ vacuum ; 2/ telephone ; 3/ washing machine ; 4/ microwave ; 5/ hairdryer ; 6/ toaster III. POST- READING : Role play -Ss work in groups asking & answering about the useful machines in their houses. Example Exchanges : A: What is the vacuum used for ? B: It is used to clean the floor. HOMEWORK:. -Read the poem again and do the exercises in workbook . -Be ready for Write and revision for the second term .. Date of preparation: 7 /5/2011.  UNIT. INVENTIONS Period 104 :. Lesson 4. WRITE < P. 152 - 153>. A. Aims: Writing about the procedure of papermaking and describe how cacao beans are processed. B. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to complete their writing about the procedure of making paper and how cacao beans are processed. C. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures , cardboard , posters . D/ Ways of working : Individuals, pair work , group work D. Procedure: * Checking up: Ask Ss to say what vacuum / toaster/ hairdryer…used for. * Warm up : Jumbled words 1. lppu = pulp 2. llreor = roller 3. morever = remove 4. rdian = drain I / PRE- WRITING : 1/ Pre-teach : - T elicits the words from Ss. -log (n): a thick piece of wood that is cut from a tree -chip(n): [ picture] lát, khoanh -wood pulp (n):[ explanation] bột ghỗ - flatten(v) : (to) make something become flat -refine (v): [ translation] tinh chế -(to) roast :[ explanation] rang, nướng - (to) bring out : [ the ditto ] toả ra - flavor (n) : [ explanation] hương vị đặc biệt - (to) ferment : [ the ditto ] làm lên men 2/ Exercise 1 : Gap fill.

(199) -T explains the requirement of this exercise. - Ask the Ss to read the text on page 152 and fill in the gaps with the right sequence markers to describe the procedure of paper making . - Ask the Ss some questions to check if they understand the text . : + What is cut into chips ? + What are chips mixed with before they are crushed to heavy pulp ? + Why is the pulp passed through rollers ? + What is the last step in paper- making ? - Ss work individually to complete the passage then share with a partner . -T collects Ss’ answers and corrects. -T asks Ss to read the whole passage. *Answer key : 1) First 2) Then 3) Next 4) After this 5) Then 6) Finally II. WHILE- WRITING: * Exercise 2 -T explains the requirement of this exercise. - T runs through all the pictures and asks Ss to answer the questions in pairs . 1/ What can you see in picture (1)? ( The fruit harvest is fermented.) 2/ Are the beans dried in the sun?(Picture 2) ( Yes, they are ) 3/ What do people do with the beans (picture 3)? ( They clear the beans in special machines) 4/ Are the beans roasted ( picture 4)? ( Yes, they are ) 5/ What can you see in pictures 5 , 6 ? ( They are shelled and ground into liquor / they make the liquor into chocolate candy or cocoa powder.) -T asks Ss to look at the sequence of pictures and read the sentences to order them .Ss can use the sequence markers to link the sentences together in a paragraph.( Ss work individually then pair compare ) - T collects Ss’ answers and corrects. * Answer key : d – a –e – c – b - f III. POST- WRITING : -T asks Ss to retell how cacao beans are processed. Ss work in groups . * HOMEWORK : - Rewrite the process of cacao making. - Learn new words by heart . - Do exercise in workbook . - Be ready for REVISION ( UNIT 9- UNIT 16) Date of preparation 7 / 5 / 2011 UNIT. INVENTIONS Period 105. Lesson 5 LANGUAGE FOCUS-P.154,155. A/ Aims: To further practice in using the passive ,writing the Wh-question in passive and the sequence markers . B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to change active sentences into passive ones and write Wh- questions in passive , and the sequence markers . C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, posters . D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pair work , group work . E/ Procedure: I/ Vocabulary : - ( to) run a business / company [ translation] ( to be in charge of something ) - around the corner = very near . - due to = because of - zipper [ realia ] - xerography [ translation] * Checking vocabulary : What and Where . II/ Language Focus 1: 1. Presentation : * Revision: - Ask Ss to say the passive in the simple past: Was/ were + past participle and how to change from the active into the passive ..

(200) - Ss run through the exercises given on page 154 . 2. Practice : - Have Ss look at the exercise and change the sentences into the passive . - Ss work in individual within 3 minutes then share with a partner . - Call some Ss to give their answers and write on the board . - T gets feedback and corrects. * Answer key: a) The document was typed by Mrs. Quyen . b) The computer was repaired by Mr. Nhan c) The picture was drawn by Ba . d) The lights were turned off by Hoa . e) The cake was baked by LAN . III/ Language Focus 2: 1. Presentation: - T has the Ss look at the sentence "e " in exercise 1 and tell the difference between the two sentences . ( Why must we put the verb in active or in passive .) - Ss answer . - T reminds . 2. Practice : - Oral drill . - T models the first sentence. Ss listen. - T has one student read the sentence and another student repeat sentence . - T gets feedback and corrects. - Have some Ss to write the completed sentences on the board. * Answer key: a) Was awarded b) won c) ran d) was run / was sold e ) was closed /( closed ) III/ Language Focus 3: 1. Presentation : - Have the Ss put a question for each of the underlined phrases in the sentences in exercise 3 . - Go through the underlined words with the Ss before . Ex: a) the zipper What b) Maize What / in the 16 th century When c) by Lewis Water man Who / in 1884 When d) in Hungary Where e) in copying machines in which machine - T models the first sentence . 2. Practice Writing drill: - Ask the Ss to say the next sentence . - T gives feedback and corrects. - Have the Ss do the rest of the exercises orally with the same steps , then ask Ss to go to the board and write complete sentences . IV / Languages focus 4: 1. Presentation : - T elicits the sequence markers from Ss. Ss answer individually(first , then , next , after this and finally ) - Ask the Ss to use the pictures and the word cues on page 155 to write a description of how white rice is produced in the traditional way , using the sequence markers . 2. Practice : - Have the Ss work in pairs within 3 minutes then rewrite individually. ( Ss can work in groups of five / four ) - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct and have a student read the whole paragraph aloud . - Ask Ss to write 4 sentences on the board . HOMEWORK : - Language 1 : Turn. the passive sentences into the active . - Language 3 : put a question for each of the underlined phrases in the sentences . - Copy the exercises in your notebooks. Do exercises in workbook .. .

(201) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.. HỒ SƠ GỒM CÓ : Giáo án anh văn 8 Giáo án tự chọn anh văn 8 1 sổ báo giảng 1 sổ điểm cá nhân 1 sổ dự giờ 1 sổ hội họp 1 sổ tay chuyên môn 1 sổ tay tự học tự rèn.

(202) Tổ : ngoại ngữ. Chatting: centigrade a) Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV or on the radio? b) What does it often tell you about? (weather and temperature) c) Do you think it’s necessary to listen to the weather forecast? Why? Why not? d) What do you know about the high and the low temperature? (It refers to the lowest and the highest temperature degrees in a day) Memory game - Ask Ss to observe the picture on P 126. * Questions: a) How many people are there in the picture? b) What are they doing? c) Name all things in the pictures. (rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper fan, a flag) 5. The Great Wall of China first wasn’t in the list of the seven wonders of the world. 6. In the early 15 th century, the Khmer King chose Angkor Wat as the new capital..

(203) A good memory is a great help in learning a language . Everybody learns his own language by remembering what he hears when he is a small child , and some children like boys and girls who live abroad with their parents seem to learn two languages almost as easily as one .In school, it isn't so easy to learn a second language because the students have little time for it , and they are busy with other subjects as well . The best way for most of us to remember things is to join them in our mind with something which we know already or which we easily remember because we have a picture of it in our mind . That is why it is better to learn words in sentences , not by themselves , or to see ,or do , or feel what a word means when we first use it . 1/ Answer the questions : a/ Why is it difficult to learn a second language in school ? ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. b/ What is a great help in learning a language ? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. c/ 2/ Write True [T] or False [F] : a/ People learn their own language by remembering what they hear when they are small children ………… b/ It's very easy for children who live abroad with their parents to learn two language …………….. c/ Learning words in sentences isn't good ......................... A/ Listen: Listen and fill in the gaps : ( 1.5 ms) This is the (1) emergency room in a large hospital . A paramedic is wheeling a (2)..............on a stretcher into the emergency room where a doctor is waiting to treat the patient . The patient doesn't look well . His head is (3)........... and his eyes are closed . A nurse is pushing an empty (4)...........towards the exit . She is probably taking it to a patient in the ambulance . B/ Language focus : I/ Choose the best answer : ( 1.5 ms) 1. People throw (away/ out/ into ) billions of cans every year . 2. Thank you very much for the flowers you (send/ sending/ sent) last night . 3. Melt the mixture (until / when / before ) it becomes a liquid . 4. It's too cold outside . ( Would you like to shut the window/ Will you shut the window / shall I shut the window .) . - Sure . I'll do it right now . 5. We are delighted (get/ to get / getting ) your letter last week . 6. Share your (recycling / repeat/ reuse ) story with your reads . II/ Match the two halves of the sentences together :(1.5 ms) A B 1/ People use first - aid a. is the math teacher in our school . 2/ Could I help you b. made in Japan . 3/ Her father bought a new car c. in order to ease the victim's pain and anxiety . 4/ The old man talking to the principal d. with your luggage ? 5/ Would you mind if I e. back to the factory for recycling . 6/ Drink cans are brought f. borrowed your bike . 1 +………….; 2 +………….; 3 +………….; 4+………….; 5+………….;6+…………. C/ Reading : Every day of the year throughout the world , about twenty million paper bags and newspapers are screwed and thrown away . Making paper requires a lot of wood pulp and the work of millions of workers . Many countries have had plans to recycle waste paper to save money and labor . In countries where there is the cooperation of the public, take away the ink, crush it up and make it into pulp again . For every ton of recycled newsprint, twelve trees can be saved . We can insist that the more paper people save , the more trees are preserved . ( pulp (n) bột giay, bột nhão sợi gỗ (để làm giấy) ; labor (n) lao động ) 1/ Answer the questions : (2 ms) a. How many paper bags and newspapers are thrown away every day ? b. What have many countries done to save money and labor in making paper ? c. What do they need when they make paper ? d. How many trees can be saved for every ton of recycled newsprint ? 2/ Answer true (T) or false(F) (1.5 ms).

(204) a. If we save more paper, many trees can be cut down ………….. b. There is the cooperation of the public in making paper . ……….. D/ Write : Use the given words to make complete sentences (2.5 ms) 1. old car tires / recycle / make / shoes / sandals . ………………………………………. 2. Do / mind / turn / television ? ………………………………………………………. 3. Old lamp / make / China / 5 dollars . ………………………………………………….. 4. It / not difficult / keep / school yard / clean . …………………………………………. 5. I / pleased / you / know / how / protect / environment . …………………………………………………………………………………….. A/ Listen : Nghe và điền từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống : (1.5ms) 1. Let's start wiith Sydney. It will be a dry day in Sydney today, and windy . For the …………………., the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty -six degrees. 2. London is going to have a……………… day . It will be very cold . 3. Bangkok will be warm and dry , with a low of ………………………centigrade and a high of thirtytwo . B/ Language focus : Chọn 1 từ đúng trong ngoặc , rồi viết vào khoảng trống : (3ms) 1.The family climbed in and paddled ……………..to the middle of the lake.( of/ in / out ) 2. Christmas songs ....................everywhere. (perform /are performing /are performed) 3. Japan has a big ........................... industry . (car-making / making - car / car - made ) 4. They told their children ..................up the tree . (don't climb /not climb/ not to climb) 5. She asked me ……………. I liked coffee or not ( if / as / whenever ) 6. Choose the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently :................. ( A.compile B.sing C.marine D.fix ) 7. The Hanging Gardens of Babylon is one of the …………….. of the world .( buildings/ wonders / strangers) 8. Our uncle phoned while I and my sister …………… a movie on TV last night . ( watched / watch / were watching ) 9. Those students ……………. in class . ( always talked / are always talking / have always talked ) 10.His car ....................yesterday afternoon. ( washes / was washing / was washed ) 11. She told me .................. to travel to Hoi An Town. ( where / what / how ) 12.It was raining heavily when they .................. home . ( get / getting / got ) C/ Reading : (3 m s) THE RICE- COOKING FESTIVAL This report shows how the rice cooking festival was held . The festival was held in…(1)………… house yard about one kilometer away from a river . There were three competitions : water-fetching, firemaking and rice- cooking . The festival took one day . In the water-fetching contest one person (2) …………… each team had to run to the river to get the water. In the fire- making contest two team members had to make a fire in the traditional way. They tried to rub pieces of bamboo (3)……………… to make the fire. Six people from each team took part in the rice- cooking contest. They had to (4) …………….. the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. After the three contests, all the points were added and the Thon Trieu team won the grand prize. The festival was wonderful. A/ Chọn từ đúng để hoàn thành đoạn văn trên: (1,0 m ) 5. A . common B. Commune C. communal 6. A. from B. to C. of 7. A. each other B. together C. one another 8. A to separate B. separate C. deliver B/ Trả lời các câu hỏi sau ( 2,0 ms ) 1/What is the name of the festival ? - ……………………………………………… 2/ How many contests were there in the rice- cooking festival ? What are they ? - …………………………………………………………………… 3/ What did people do to make the fire in the fire- making contest ? - …………………………………………………………………… 4/ What did people have to do before they cooked the rice ? - …………………………………………………………………… D/ Writing : ( 2,5ms ) Làm theo yêu cầu trong ngoặc đơn :.

(205) 1/ Hoa said , " I must go to the music room now.” (Viết câu bắt đầu bằng từ cho sẳn) - Hoa ……………………………………………….................................... 2/ The Pham has just bought a machine which is used to print labels .(Viết lại câu sử dụng tính từ ghép ) -The Pham ………………………………………………………..................... 3/ They opened the Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco in 1973 .( Đổi sang câu bị động ) ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 4/ The students / ask / their teacher / how/ travel / Hue / last week .(Dùng từ gợi ý viết thành câu) - ………………………………………........................................................... 5/ " Do many tourists visit the citadel ?" Nga asked Hoa ( Chuyển sang câu gián tiếp ) - ………………………………………………………………………….. Unit 16 INVENTIONS (5 tiết). 96 97 98 99 100. Getting Started + Listen and Read Speak + Listen Read Write Language Focus. III/ Writing : Read the passage below , then write the telephone message : Mrs Lan , a customer telephoned the Sai Gon Coop-Mart on January 20th at 10 am . She wanted to speak to Mrs Hoa but she wasn't in her office . So Mrs Binh took a message for Mrs Hoa . She wanted to asked about her food delivery . She said Mrs Hoa could reach her at 9293232 before midday . THE SAI GON COOP-MART Date : ………………………….. Time : ……………………………………. For : ……………………………………………. Message : …………………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. Taken by : ………………………………………. KEYS : I/ Listening : (2ms) 1. b 2.c 3.b 4.b . II/ Language focus : ( 3ms) 1/ a. To visit b. ourselves c. goes d. on e . emigrate f. nice new red . 2/ a. This coat is warm enough for her to wear in winter . b. commercial c. Why did she stay late at the office ? III/ Writing : (2.5ms) Date : January 20th. Time : 10 a .m For : Mrs Hoa Message : Mrs Lan telephoned / called about her food delivery . She wants you to call her before midday . Her telephone number is 9293232 Taken by : Mrs Binh . IV/ Reading : ( 2.5ms) 1/ a. We must put all chemicals and drugs in locked cupboard. b. Because playing with matches can cause a fire . ( Remember one match can start a fire ) 2/ a. F b. T c. T . ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Lan : Can I help you cook dinner, Mom ? Mrs. Tu : Sure.You can cook the “Special Chinese Fried Rice” for me. Use the big (0) pan, please. Lan : Okay.how much oil do I put in ? Mrs.Tu : Just a little. Wait until it’s (1)......................and then fry the garlic and the green peppers. Lan : Do I put the (2).............................and the peas in now ? Mrs .Tu : Yes. And you can put the (3)...........................and a teaspoon of salt in..

(206) - Date of preparation: 26 / 9 / 2011. UNI. MY FRIENDS - Period 4 Lesson 3 - Subject : Englísh - Author :. Read - P . 13-14 Grade:8. Trần Thị Luynh. Time: 45 minutes. A/ Aims: Reading for details a text about Ba's friends, help Ss practice reading skill. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the adjectives when describing people's characters. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, blackboards. D/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, groups E/ Procedure: I/ PRE-READING.  Check-up : ( Warm up ) Guessing game : - Stick the pictures on the board and describe . - Ss listen and guess who is he / she and say ; if it's right she / he is a winner then goes to the board and describe another picture . - help ss remember how to describe someone's appearance..

(207) Teacher's activities. Time allotted T describes: This person is short and fat Ss guess and say his/ her name.( if it's right, he 5 with short bold black hair. or she go to the board and describes another minutes picture. - Ss continue the game. 1/ Pre- teach : - a character [ translation ] -sociable (adj) [ explanation ] - generous (adj) [ the ditto] - joke (n) [ explanation ]. Teacher's activities. - reserved ( adj )  outgoing (adj) - to annoy : to make (you) angry or bored - outgoing = friendly (adj). Time Teacher's activities Teacher's activities allotted 2/ Setting the scene and prediction: : ( 4 minute) - elicit the words from ss - answer 7 Do you have any close/best friends? What is his/her name? What does he/ she look like? What does he/ she - read - repeat ( in chorus, in individual) minutes like? What like doing in his her -free - write the does wordshe/ on she the board copytime? downToday you're going to read a text about Ba's friends. Ba describes 3 of his close friends. Do you guess what Ba describes about his friends ? -. Teacher's activities - Ask Ss some questions : - Do you have any close/best friends? What is his/her name? What does he/ she look like? What does he/ she like? What does he/ she like doing in his her free time?. Teacher's activities - answer. Time allotted 7 minutes. - Today you're going to read a text about Ba's friends. Ba describes 3 of his close friends. Do you guess what Ba describes about his friends ? - give cues : their appearance, names, ages, - look at the cues and guess characters, addresses, families, favorite food, things what yhey like doing in the free time - write their predictions on the board. II/ WHILE-READING :  Ss read the text (P. 13,14). and check their prediction . " About their favorite activities and their characters ." 0  Multiple choice: Ss read the text again and do Exercise 1-P. 14 (Individuals + pairs work) -T explains the meanings of the phrases: + doesn't affect his school work . / + rather shy / + get tired of … Answer key: a)A b)C c)B d)D Comprehension questions - Run through the questions (a-f) in Exercise 2 P. 14 - Give Ss 10 minutes to read the text again and write the answers to the questions..

(208) - Ask Ss to work in pairs and do the exercise 2 - Collect Ss' answers using the Lucky number . Answer key: a) Ba feels lucky having a lot of friends. b) Bao is the most sociable. c) Khai likes reading. d) (A bad things about Ba is that) sometimes his jokes annoy his friends. e) Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local orphanage. III/ POST-READING :.  Ss work in groups of four and complete the table - Let the Ss read the text describing Ba 's friends to fill in the table . Name Characters Likes doing 1 2 3 - Then have Ss ask and answer about other closed friends . ( if there is enough time ) 1/ What's his / her name ? 2/ What does she / he look like ? 3/ What does she / he like doing ?  T. walks round the classroom monitoring the class, encouraging Ss to talk. IV/ HOMEWORK - Learn vocabulary . Be ready for "Write"(P.15 ) - Make a list of adjectives used to describe people's appearance and characters. . Teacher's activities. Teacher's activities. Time allotted Ss guess and say his/ her name.( if it's right, he 5 or she go to the board and describes another minutes picture. - Ss continue the game.. T describes: This. Date of preparation: 22/11/2011 PERIOD 41 :. CORRECTI. A/ Aims: -To help Ss identify the typical and common mistakes in their paper tests . - To help Ss remind of the grammar points relating to the test . B/ Ways of working: Individuals, pairs, and the whole class C/ Materials : posters D/ Procedure:.

(209) I/ Running through the test :  Hand out Ss 's papers (after they have been marked)  Ask Ss to answer the questions : a/ How many parts are there in the test ? b/ What are they ? ( What must we do in part I,II,..) II/ Revising the grammar points and vocabulary relating to the test : - T elicits the target languages from Ss .  Reported speech : commands , requests and advices .  Gerunds : ( v-ing )  Modal verbs : may, can, could…(used in asking for favors ,offering assistance and responding .  Adverbs of manner .  Prepositions of time .  Used to  (to) tell / ask somebody to do something . - The words to talk about learn a language , their report card . III/ Talking about the results of their tests : - Not many Ss understand , remember the structures, words and do the test well. - No one gets 10 marks . - Most of the weak Ss can't rewrite the sentences using reported speech, used to , … - Some can't answer the qs in reading and rewrite a sentence . - Some Ss have many mistakes about spelling . IV/ Correction :  Ask them to find out their mistake and self-correct them first (if necessary).  Have the whole class correct the test . I. Listening : - T sticks the poster with the wrong sentences on the board and let Ss listen to the tape again and the whole class correct. - Correction . II/ Reading : - T sticks the poster with wrong sentences on the board then runs through and explains the difficult phrases and sentences in the text . - Have the whole class correct . 1/ Answer the questions : / a/ His pronunciation of English words was really bad and his English grammar was worse . b/ His teacher of English did ( wanted to meet Nam one afternoon after the lesson ) c/ She told him how to use an English - English dictionary to improve his English grammar . d/ He won the first prize in the English Speaking Contest held for secondary school students his hometown one year later . 2/ Answer true or false : a/ F b/ T III/ Language focus : (3 ms ) A/ Choose the correct word : - Ask Ss who have the wrong answers to read aloud and the whole class correct . - Get Ss to explain and say why they must choose that word . - Correction . A/ Choose the correct word : 1/ a 2/ No problem 3/ hard 4/ live 5/ listening 6/ England B/ Match a suggestion or question in A with its response in B : 1+ f ; 2+ e ; 3+ d ; 4+ b ; 5+ a ; 6+ c ..

(210) IV/ Writing : - T hangs the poster with the wrong answers on the board and asks some Ss to go to the board and correct . - Correction . Rewrite the following sentences as directed : 1/ His( Nam's) mother said Nam (he) should work harder next school year . 2/What did they collect for recycling ? 3/ We used to play blind man's bluff when I was a child . 4/ The student asked many questions in order to understand the lesson . 5/ He asked (told) us to shut the door but not to lock it . HOMEWORK: - T congratulates the Ss who have good and excellent tests and flays Ss who get bad marks , then encourages them to study harder . - To ask them to correct the tests by themselves again . - Review Unit 5,6. - Be ready for (READ)(Unit 7) .. . Exercise 2: (p. 69) Substitution drill :  T. explains: for + a period of time ® for a week since + a point of time ® since last week  Ss work in pairs filling in the gaps with for or since.  T reads out a phrase , Ss add "since or For " . Ss repeat in chorus . Ex : T : Five minutes . SS: For five minutes . - Go on until Ss can remember how to use " since, for". A.Yêu cầu về kiến thức ngôn ngữ(Vocabulary,Grammar,Language functions) 1/Ôn tập các từ thuộc chủ điểm đã học trong học kì I. 2/Phân biệt sử dụng các thì của động từ:thì hiện tại đơn,thì quá khứ đơn,thì hiện tại tiếp diễn,thì hiện tại hoàn thành,các cách diễn đạt tương lai -Hiện tại đơn: S + am/is/are..../S + V(s/es).... -Quá khứ đơn:S + was/were..../S + V2/V-ed.... -Hiện tại tiếp diễn:S + am/is/are + V-ing... -Hiện tại hoàn thành(với since và for):S + have/has + p.p.... * Since + điểm thời gian * For + khoảng thời gian. -Diễn đạt tương lai với Be going to:S + am/is/are + going to + inf... 3/Các trạng từ chỉ nơi chốn,thể cách. 4/Ôn tập cấu trúc câu:...(not) adjective + enough + to-infinitive...,...used to +infinitive... 5/Ôn tập các đại từ phản thân(Reflexive pronouns): - myself,yourself,yourselves,herself,himself,itself,themselves,ourselves. 6/Ôn tập cách dùng modal verbs:must,have to,ought to,should,may,can,could + bare-inf... 7/Đặt câu hỏi với Why và trả lời bằng Because..

(211) 8/Các giới từ chỉ thời gian và nơi chốn. 9/Các cấu trúc:Commands,requests and advice in reported speech. -Commands.requests: S + asked/told + O + to-inf.. -Advice: S1 + said + S2 + should + bare-inf... 10/Asing for favors and responding to favors. 11/Offering assistance and responding to assistance. 12/Các dạng động từ như:Verbs (like,love,enjoy,hate...) + V-ing. 13/So sánh hơn,so sánh nhất và so sánh bằng của các loại tính từ.Các hình thức so sánh với:Like, (not)as...as,(not) the same as,different from. 14/Mô tả hình dáng,mái tóc và tính cách con người. B.Yêu cầu về kĩ năng(Skills) 1/Đọc hiểu. a.Đọc bài khóa(text/dialogue) thuộc phạm vi chủ đề, chủ điểm đã học để trả lời các câu hỏi liên quan đến nội dung, chọn câu Đúng /Sai(True/False) b.Chọn từ thích hợp(đã cho) để điền vào bài khóa.(8-10 chỗ trống) 2/Viết  Cần nắm vững cấu trúc câu(các thành phần chính,trật tự từ trong câu,thì của động từ...) để: -Sắp xếp các từ xáo trộn (không thêm từ) thàng câu hoàn chỉnh. -Chuyển đổi câu (viết lại câu) theo cấu trúc khác nhưng ý nghĩa diễn đạt vẫn không thay đổi (lời trực tiếp ,gián tiếp ...) -Sử dụng các từ gợi ý đã cho (và thêm từ) để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. -Ôn lại các bài viết theo chủ điểm đã học. HOMEWORK: Review all units from unit 1 to unit 8  HƯỚNG DẪN CHẤM - HỌC KÌ I năm học 2010-2011 MÔN TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 I. (4điểm) . Mỗi câu đúng được 0.5 điểm Questions 1 2 3 4 5 Answer. Have to. on. outside. To sing. going. 6 Old enough. 7 more. II.(1.5 điểm ) Mỗi câu đúng được 0.5 điểm 1. to practice 2. has worked 3. pass III. .(1. điểm ) Mỗi câu đúng được 0.25 điểm 2. e 3. b 4. d 5. a IV. .(2 điểm ) Mỗi câu đúng được 0.5 điểm 1. His pronunciation of English words was really bad and his English grammar was worse . ( He had difficulties in both pronunciation and grammar .) 2. One afternoon after the lesson, his teacher of English wanted to meet him . 3. The teacher / She showed him cassettes of pronunciation drills kept in a glass bookcase . 4. She told him how to use an English- English dictionary to improve hisEnglish grammar . V..(1.5 điểm ) Mỗi câu đúng được 0.5 điểm 1. The gardener told us not to walk on the grass. 2. Lan has been in the USA for two years . 3. I'm not as tall as you . ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. Lucky numbers :. 8 The best.

(212) 1/ What do you call the festival where people have to cook rice ? (Rice cooking festival ) 2/ How many competitions are there in the rice cooking festival ? What are they ? ( 3/ water- fetching , fire-making , and rice-cooking ) 3/ What do people use to fetch water ? (bottles) 4/ Lucky number ! 5/ Lucky number ! 6/ Do they use pieces of wood to make fire ? ( No, pieces of bamboo ) 7/ What do people have to do before they cook rice ? ( separate the rice from the hush ) 8/ Lucky number ! 9/ How many people are there altogether in a team taking part in the rice cooking festival ? ( 9 / one - Ask Ss to choose one of the festivals on P 123 and make up their own dialogue.( Mid-Fall festival ) - T monitors and helps Ss while they are working.. - Have Ss write their preparation for the Mid-Fall festival , then collect Ss’ anwers. + take part in Dragon Dance + Play games + Make / buy moon cakes + Make / buy lanterns + ..... - Call on some pairs to demonstrate their dialogues. - T gives feedback and corrects.for water -fetching , two for fire- making , 6 for rice cooking ) Find things in common - Ask the Ss to think of 5 things you often do to prepare for the Tet holiday and write them down on a piece of paper . - Divide the class into 2 sides . - Choose one student randomly in a sides and ask him / her to call out his / her words while the Ss in the other side check ( √ ) the words on their paper same as that student . The student who has the most same answers will get 1 good mark . - decorate/ clean/ paint/ the house/ the room - buy cakes/ candies/ drinks/ food/ fruits/... - cook/ make cakes - write/ send New Year cards to friends/ - Relatives Quiz 1. What is the end of everything? (letter g) 2. What word start with T, ends with T, and is full of T? (teapot) 3. What is in the middle of New York City? (York) - 4. Which river in America has 4 eyes? (Mississippi): four eyes ® homonym The festival/ be/ hold/ in/ Tran Hung Dao secondary school yard. There/ be/ three/ competitions;/ tug of war contest/ picture- drawing contest/ flower- arranging contest . OF--IThe festival/ take/ one day. NG THE COMMUNIST YOUTH UNION OF - IIn/ the tug of war contest / grade 8 & 9/ there/ be/ two teams./ each teams/ have/ 10 members/ 10 boy friends/ or /5 girl friends/ take part in. NH FThere / be /only /one member / each team / take part in / picture- drawing contest ./ they / have to /draw/ a picture/ without looking at it . Two people/ each team/ take part in / flower –arranging contest . They/ have to/ finish/ their work / about 30 minutes. - The festival/ be/ thrilling and exciting. - Call on some Ss to the front of the class and ask them to write their reports on the board.

(213) - T gives feedback and corrects. Answers: The festival was held in Tran Hung Dao secondary school yard.There were three competitions; tug of war contest, picture-drawing contest, singing contest.The festival took one day.In the tug of war contest of grade 8 & 9, there were two teams. Each team had 10 members with 5 boy friends or 5 girl friends took part in. There was only one member from each team to take part in the picture- drawing contest . They had to draw picture without looking at it . Two people from each team took part in the flower-arranging contest. They had to finish their work in about 30 minutes. - The festival was thrilling and exciting. THE MID- AUTUMN FESTIVAL. b. The festival/ hold/15th of August/ school yard. c. The festival/ last/3 hours. d. There/many/ activities/such as: watching dragon dance / wearing masks/ parading on the the roads /and banging the drums. e. The children/ interested/ a special cake “Moon cakes” f. Children/ go on/ play/traditional games until mid- night. g, This festival/ a very special occasion/ Vietnamese people/ especially for children / play/ enjoy/ a variety of activities. - Moreover, children/understand more / Vietnamese traditions..

(214)

Giao an tong hop

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về